Luke 7:6 — Word Study
N1904Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν πρὸς αὐτὸν φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
BSA<the>ho Andde JesusIēsous [the Messiah, God's salvation] was goingporeuō▸ withsun them.autos [in their company, together] Alreadyēdē thende when heautos notou farmakran being distantapechō▸ [at a short distance, nearby] fromapo theho houseoikia [the dwelling, home] sentpempō▸ topros himautos friends [close associates, companions] theho centurionhekatontarchos [a Roman military officer, leader of 100 men] sayinglegō▸ to Him;autos Lord,kurios [Master, God, the One in authority] notmē do be troubled;skullō▸ [disturb, bother] notou forgar worthyhikanos [sufficient, deserving] I am thathina underhupo theho roofstegē [enter my home, dwell with me] of mineegō You may come,eiserchomai▸
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| Ὁ | <the> | Article, nominative, singular |
| δὲ | And | Conjunction |
| Ἰησοῦς | Jesus | Noun, nominative, singular |
| ἐπορεύετο | was going | Verb, imperfect, no voice stated |
| σὺν | with | Preposition |
| αὐτοῖς. | them. | Personal pronoun, dative, plural |
| ἤδη | Already | Adverb |
| δὲ | then | Conjunction |
| αὐτοῦ | when he | Personal pronoun, genitive, singular |
| οὐ | not | Particle, negative |
| μακρὰν | far | Adverb |
| ἀπέχοντος | being distant | Verb, present, active |
| ἀπὸ | from | Preposition |
| τῆς | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| οἰκίας | house | Noun, genitive, singular |
| ἔπεμψεν | sent | Verb, aorist, active |
| πρὸς | to | Preposition |
| αὐτὸν | him | Personal pronoun, accusative, singular |
| φίλους | friends | |
| ὁ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| ἑκατοντάρχης | centurion | Noun, nominative, singular |
| λέγων | saying | Verb, present, active |
| αὐτῷ· | to Him; | Personal pronoun, dative, singular |
| κύριε, | Lord, | Noun, vocative, singular |
| μὴ | not | Particle, negative |
| σκύλλου· | do be troubled; | Verb, present, passive |
| οὐ | not | Particle, negative |
| γὰρ | for | Conjunction |
| ἱκανός | worthy | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| εἰμι | I am | |
| ἵνα | that | Conjunction |
| ὑπὸ | under | Preposition |
| τὴν | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| στέγην | roof | Noun, accusative, singular |
| μου | of mine | Personal pronoun, first person, genitive |
| εἰσέλθῃς, | You may come, | Verb, second aorist, active |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | So Jesus went with them. But when He was not far from the house, the centurion sent friends with the message: “Lord, do not trouble Yourself, for I am not worthy to have You come under my roof. |
| KJV | Then Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof: |
| ASV | And Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself; for I am not worthy that thou shouldest come under my roof: |
| YLT | And Jesus was going on with them, and now when he is not far distant from the house the centurion sent unto him friends, saying to him, 'Sir, be not troubled, for I am not worthy that under my roof thou mayest enter; |
| WEB | Jesus went with them. When he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying to him, “Lord, don’t trouble yourself, for I am not worthy for you to come under my roof. |
| BBE | And Jesus went with them. And when he was not far from the house, the man sent friends to him, saying, Lord, do not give yourself trouble: for I am not important enough for you to come into my house: |
The translations differ in how they phrase the centurion's request regarding Jesus' coming, particularly in the use of 'trouble not thyself' versus 'don’t trouble yourself'.
The sentence structure consists of a main clause followed by subordinate clauses that provide context and detail about the centurion's actions and words.





6 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Ellicott & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὁ
verbπορεύομαι
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Luke 7:6
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Healing of the Centurion's Servantgenerated
Luke 7:6 describes an encounter between Jesus and a centurion who seeks healing for his servant. The centurion, recognizing his own unworthiness, sends friends to communicate his request to Jesus. This narrative illustrates the themes of faith and humility, as the centurion believes in Jesus' authority to heal without needing to be physically present. The passage highlights the centurion's respect for Jesus and his understanding of authority, as he compares it to his own role as a military leader.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Matthew 20:28 | just as the Son of Man did not come to be served, but to serve, and to give His life as a ransom for many.” |
| 2 | Mark 5:24 | So Jesus went with him, and a large crowd followed and pressed around Him. |
| 3 | Acts 10:38 | how God anointed Jesus of Nazareth with the Holy Spirit and with power, and how Jesus went around doing good and healing all who were oppressed by the devil, because God was with Him. |
| 4 | Luke 8:49 | While He was still speaking, someone arrived from the house of the synagogue leader. “Your daughter is dead,” he told Jairus. “Do not bother the Teacher anymore.” |
| 5 | Luke 7:4 | They came to Jesus and pleaded with Him earnestly, “This man is worthy to have You grant this, |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 12 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — ἑκατοντάρχης, hekatontarchosgenerated
The term ἑκατοντάρχης (*hekatontarchos*) refers to a centurion, a Roman military officer in command of a hundred soldiers. This word is significant in the New Testament as it represents authority and leadership, often associated with respect and responsibility.
In this context, the centurion's humility is noteworthy; he acknowledges his unworthiness to have Jesus enter his home, demonstrating a profound understanding of Jesus' authority and power.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The verse is presented in the Berean Standard Bible, which states that Jesus went with the centurion's friends and emphasizes the centurion's humility in asking Jesus not to trouble Himself.
Different translations offer slight variations: the KJV and ASV use the phrase 'trouble not thyself', while the WEB simplifies it to 'don’t trouble yourself'. The YLT includes 'be not troubled', reflecting the centurion's respectful request.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb in the verse is ἐπορεύετο, was going, which governs the narrative. The structure includes clauses that describe the actions of Jesus and the centurion's friends, with additional phrases providing context about the centurion's message.
The sentence contains multiple clauses, including a noun phrase for the subject and prepositional phrases that clarify the relationships and actions, illustrating the complexity of the narrative.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
The word Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) appears in the Septuagint as a rendering of the Hebrew name יְהוֹשׁוּעַ (Yehoshua), which is associated with the leader of Israel after Moses. This connection emphasizes the role of Jesus as a savior and leader, paralleling the historical significance of Joshua in the Hebrew Scriptures.
The term ἐπορεύετο (poreuō) translates the Hebrew הָלַךְ (halakh), meaning 'to go' or 'to walk.' This choice reinforces the action of Jesus moving toward the centurion's house, illustrating His willingness to engage with those in need, while μακρὰν (makran), meaning 'far,' corresponds to the Hebrew רָחֹק (raḥoq), highlighting the physical distance yet emotional closeness in the centurion's plea.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Luke 7:6 tells of a centurion who sends friends to Jesus to ask Him not to trouble Himself by coming to his home, as he feels unworthy of such an honor. This story highlights the centurion's faith and respect for Jesus' authority.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
The centurion felt unworthy to approach Jesus directly, demonstrating humility and respect for Jesus' authority.
The centurion recognized Jesus' authority to heal from a distance, showing great faith in His power.
The centurion's faith is evident in his belief that Jesus can heal his servant without being present, highlighting the power of faith in Jesus' authority.
The centurion's humility teaches us the importance of recognizing our own unworthiness and approaching God with respect and faith.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- In what ways can I demonstrate humility in my own life, similar to the centurion?
- How do I understand and respond to Jesus' authority in my life?
- What does this passage teach me about faith and trust in God?
- How can I support others who are seeking help, as the centurion did for his servant?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church Fathers comment on the centurion's faith and humility, drawing lessons from his interaction with Jesus.
“I am not worthy that you should enter my house. I am not capable of receiving the Sun of Righteousness in its entirety; a little radiance from it is sufficient for me to remove sickness,Early Church Fathers on Luke 7 →
Do not imagine that someone cannot please God while he is engaged in military service. Take as an example holy David to whom the Lord gave such high testimony. Many just men of that time were soldiers.Early Church Fathers on Luke 7 →
See how the devout centurion becomes worthier to receive health as he confesses that he is unworthy. In considering his dwelling unacceptable, he has made it the more honorable and acceptable.… The Lord does not go to his house,Early Church Fathers on Luke 7 →
Commentators on this verse — 6 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Luke 7:6 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleThen Jesus went with them,.... The elders of the Jews, towards the centurion's house, after hearing their request, and their reasons for it; and that without any reluctancy, he at once complied, made
Read John Gill on Luke 7 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryThen Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter
Read Robert Jamieson on Luke 7 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments6 Then Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof: Ver. 6. For I am not worthy] So saith Jacob of himself, Genesis 32:10; so Paul, 1 Corinthians 15:8-10; so the Baptist, Matthew 3:11; so Augustine, Non sum dignus quem tu diligas, Domine, I am not worthy of thy love, Lord.
Read John Trapp on Luke 7 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(6) Then Jesus went with them.—Literally, And Jesus was going with them.The centurion sent friends to him.—The precision of St. Luke’s account leads us to receive it as a more accurate record of what St. Matthew reports in outline. It is, we may add, more true to nature. The centurion was not likely to leave the slave who was so precious to him when he seemed as in the very agonies of death. Trouble not thyself.—The word is the same as in Mark 5:35, where see Note.
Read Charles John Ellicott on Luke 7 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges6. when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him] Here the narrative of St Luke is much more detailed, and therefore probably more exact, than that of St Matthew, who represents the conversation as taking place between our Lord and the centurion himself. We see from St Luke that he had been prevented from coming in person by deep humility, and the belief that the elders would be more likely to win the boon for him. Meanwhile, he probably stayed by the bedside of his dying slave. St Matthew’s narrative is framed on the simple and common principle, qui facit per alium facit per se.Lord] The word in itself may mean no more than “Sir,” as in John 4:19; John 12:21…
Read Cambridge on Luke 7 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible§ 37. SERVANT OF THE ’S HEALED, Luke 7:1-10.Matthew 8:5-13.From the mount of Hattin to the valley of Capernaum; from the sermon to the miracle.
Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Luke 7 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
So Jesus went with them. But when He was not far from the house, the centurion sent friends with the message: “Lord, do not trouble Yourself, for I am not worthy to have You come under my roof.
Jesus went with them. When he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying to him, “Lord, don’t trouble yourself, for I am not worthy for you to come under my roof.
So Jesus went with them. But when He was not far from the house, the centurion sent friends with the message: “Lord, do not trouble Yourself, for I am not worthy to have You come under my roof.
So Jesus went with them. When he was not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to say to him, “Lord, do not trouble yourself, for I am not worthy to have you come under my roof.
Tyndale line
Then Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof:
And Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself; for I am not worthy that thou shouldest come under my roof:
And Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest come under my roof:
Then Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying to him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof;
Then Iesus went with them: but when he was now not farre from the house, the Centurion sent friendes to him, saying vnto him, Lord, trouble not thy selfe: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter vnder my roofe:
Strictly literal
And Jesus went with them. But already, when he was not far from the house, the centurion sent to him friends, saying to him, Lord, do not trouble thyself, for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof.
And Jesus was going on with them, and now when he is not far distant from the house the centurion sent unto him friends, saying to him, 'Sir, be not troubled, for I am not worthy that under my roof thou mayest enter;
And Jesus was going on with them, and now when He is not far distant from the house the centurion sent to Him friends, saying to Him, “Lord, do not be troubled, for I am not worthy that You may enter under my roof;
So Jesus continued on his way with them. But when he was not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to say to him, “Lord, do not trouble yourself, because I am not worthy for you to come under my roof.
From the Latin
And Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent his friends to him, saying: Lord, trouble not thyself; for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof.
Simplified
Jesus went with them and as they approached the house, the centurion sent some friends to Jesus to tell him, “Lord, please don't trouble yourself by coming into my house, because I'm not worthy of that.
And Jesus went with them. And when he was not far from the house, the man sent friends to him, saying, Lord, do not give yourself trouble: for I am not important enough for you to come into my house:
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Jesus autem ibat cum illis. Et cum jam non longe esset a domo, misit ad eum centurio amicos, dicens : Domine, noli vexari : non enim sum dignus ut sub tectum meum intres :
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܝܫܘܥ ܕܝܢ ܐܙܠ ܗܘܐ ܥܡܗܘܢ ܟܕ ܕܝܢ ܠܐ ܣܓܝ ܪܚܝܩ ܡܢ ܒܝܬܐ ܫܕܪ ܠܘܬܗ ܩܢܛܪܘܢܐ ܪܚܡܘܗܝ ܘܐܡܪ ܠܗ ܡܪܝ ܠܐ ܬܥܡܠ ܠܐ ܓܝܪ ܫܘܐ ܐܢܐ ܕܬܥܘܠ ܬܚܝܬ ܡܛܠܠܝ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν — — φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν — — φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
The previous edition, still widely cited.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν — — φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν — — φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν πρὸς αὐτὸν φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν — — φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ ἱκανός εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν πρὸς αὐτὸν — ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ — εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἔπεμψεν πρὸς αὐτὸν φίλους ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης λέγων αὐτῷ· κύριε, μὴ σκύλλου· οὐ γὰρ — εἰμι ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς,
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| πρὸς to | Treg, TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Tyn |
| αὐτὸν him | Treg, TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Tyn |
| φίλους friends | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR | Byz |
| ἱκανός worthy | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg | TR, Byz |
Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Luke 7:6
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.
δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),
post-positive conjunctive particle;
copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →
δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…
Read the full entry →δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…
Read the full entry →δέ (de) — then.
δέ,
but: adversative and copulative Particle,
I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. without preceding μέν,
II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. copulative,
II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…
δέ
de
a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,
etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).
δέ
Cj.
but, on the other hand, and
δέ de 2x
a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6
δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.
δέ is often redundant,
to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.
to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.
POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The Greek word Ἰησοῦς (*Iēsous*) refers primarily to Jesus, the Savior, and is derived from the Hebrew name Joshua or Jehoshua. It appears frequently in the New Testament, denoting Jesus Christ, and also refers to other figures named Jesus, such as Jesus, son of Eliezer, and Jesus Justus. The entries consistently identify it as a common name among Israelites.
Ἰησοῦς, -οὔ, dat. -οὔ, ace. -vdv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1], 6, Jesus (ΠῚ and ace. to a later form jw, Syr. > ” Saas, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; but later writ. gave the name the force of My31w, see Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very Com. prop. name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; ΓΚ. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often; see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus…
Read the full entry →Ἰησοῦς nor in language of disrespect to the established religion of our city”: see further CRE® p. 260, and Lightfoot Assays on Supernatural Religion, p. 299f., who cites an inscr. found in this very temple of Ephesus, though of a later date than the passage in Acts,—éorw ἱεροσυλία kal ἀσέβεια, ““let it be regarded as sacrilege and impiety” (Wood Zzscr. vi. I, p. 14). Other exx. of the adj. from the inscrr. are Syll 523% (iii/B.c.) ὁ δὲ εἴπας ἢ [πρήξ]ας τι παρὰ τόνδε τὸν νόμον .. . ἔστω ἱερόσυλος, 2). 6028 (iv/iii B.c.) ἢν δέ τις [τὴν στήλην] ἀφαν[(ζηι ἢ τὰ γράμματα], πασχέτω ὡς ἱερόσυλος, and 24. 680!° (Rom.). The new Menander shows several exx. of ἱερόσυλε used in abuse with a general sense (cf. ‘‘ horse-thief’’): e.g. Menandrea, p. 60 388 tep[d]ovde παῖ, Ρ. 3852: ἱερόσυλε…
Read the full entry →Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς
Iesous
of Hebrew origin (3091); Jesus (i.e. Jehoshua), the name of our Lord
and two (three) other Israelites:--Jesus.
see HEBREW for 03091
Ἰησοῦς, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
Jesus
Ἰησοῦς Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour, NTest.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
je'-zus (Iesous, for yehoshua`):
(1) Joshua, son of Nun (the King James Version Ac 7:45; Heb 4:8; compare 1 Macc 2:55; 2 Esdras 7:37).
(2) (3) High priest and Levite.
See JESHUA, 2, 5.
(4) Son of Sirach.
See SIRACH.
(5) An ancestor of Jesus (Lu 3:29, the King James Version "Jose").
(6) (7) See the next three articles.
Jesus
(1.) Joshua, the son of Nun (Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; R.V., “Joshua”).
(2.) A Jewish Christian surnamed Justus (Col. 4:11).
Je’sus, the proper, as Christ is the official, name of our Lord. To distinguish him from others so called, he is spoken of as “Jesus of Nazareth” (John 18:7), and “Jesus the son of Joseph” (John 6:42).
This is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Joshua, which was originally Hoshea (Num. 13:8, 16), but changed by Moses into Jehoshua (Num. 13:16;
called Jestus, a Christian who was with St. Paul at Rome. (Colossians 4:11) (A.D. 57.)
savior; deliverer
988 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 43 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ λαοῦ κεκραγότων εἶπε πρὸς Μωυσῆν·
ὁ δὲ τῆς πληθύος ἀποκρίνας πᾶν τὸ μάχιμον Ἰησοῦν ἐφίστησιν αὐτῷ Ναυήκου μὲν υἱὸν φυλῆς τῆς Ἐφραιμίτιδος, ἀνδρειότατον δὲ καὶ πόνους ὑποστῆναι γενναῖον καὶ νοῆσαί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν ἱκανώτατον καὶ θρησκεύοντα τὸν θεὸν ἐκπρεπῶς καὶ Μωυσῆν διδάσκαλον τῆς…
ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.
οτο Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ … … ιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου … … Τιβερίου τοῦ ωηις
r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. ὑπατείας τοῦ αὐτοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου ἔτους ιϛ,
r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. Βασιλείας τοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου καὶ φιλανθρώπου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαουίου
πορεύομαι is a middle voice verb meaning to go or travel, derived from a root associated with passage. It covers a range of meanings from literal travel to metaphorical uses, such as living a certain way or departing from life. The New Testament frequently uses it to describe journeys, both physical and spiritual, including references in Matthew and Luke.
πορεύω,
(< πόρος, a ford, a passage),
[in LXX chiefly for הלךְ;]
in cl. (the act. becomes obsolete in late Gk.; v. M, Pr., 162), to cause to go over, carry, convey. Mid. (always in LXX and NT), -ομαι, to go, proceed, go on one's way: c. acc., ὁδόν, Ac 8:39; seq. ἐκεῖθεν, Mt 19:15; ἐντεῦθεν, Lk 13:31; ἀπό, Mt 25:41, Lk 4:42; εἰς, Mt 2:20, Mk 16:12, Lk 1:39, Jo 7:35, al; εἰς εἰρήνην (cf. I Ki…
πορεύω : to lead over, carry over, transfer, (Pind., Soph., Thue., Plat., al.); Mid. (fr. Hdt. down), pres. πορεύομαι; impf. ἐπορευόμην ; fut. πορεύσομαι; pf. ptep. πεπορευμένος ; 1 aor. subjune. 1 pers. plur. πορευσώμεθα (Jas. iv. 13 Rec. Grsb.); 1 aor. pass. ἐπορεύθην ; (πόρος a ford, [cf. Eng. pore i. 6. passage through ; Curtius § 356; Vanitek p- 479]) ; Sept. often for 727, JAN, 12; prop. to lead one’s self across ; i. e. to take one’s way, betake one’s self, set out, depart ; a. prop.: τὴν ὁδόν μου, to pursue the journey on which one has entered, continue one’s journey, [A. V. go on one’s way], Acts viii. 39; πορ. foll. by ἀπό w. agen. of place, to depart from, Mt. xxiv. 1 [R G]; ἀπό w. a gen. of the pers., Mt. xxv. 41; Lk. iv. 42; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. xix. 15; ἐντεῦθεν, Lk. xiii. 31; foll. by εἰς w. an ace. of place, to go, depart, to some place: Mt. ii. 20; xvii. 27; Mk. xvi.12; Lk.i.…
Read the full entry →πορεύω (poreuō) — to travel.
πορ-εύω,
future -σω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἐπόρευσα, poetry πόρευσα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive and middle, future πορεύσομαι [LXX+5th c.BC+]aorist ἐπορευσάμην (only compounds ἐν-, προ-, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.: perfect πεπόρευμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:(πόρος):
I. active, make to go, carry, convey, by land or water, τινα [Refs 6th c.BC+]: with doubleaccusative, carry or ferry over, [Νέσσος] ποταμὸν.. Βροτοὺς μισθοῦ 'πόρευε [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. of things, bring, carry, ἐπιστολὰς πατρί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; furnish, bestow, χρυσόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; set in motion, κίνησις.. βραδυτῆτάς τε καὶ τάχη.. π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.3. absolutely, conduct a search, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πορεύομαι
poreuomai
middle voice from a derivative of the same as 3984; to traverse, i.e.
travel (literally or figuratively; especially to remove (figuratively,
die), live, etc.); --depart, go (away, forth, one's way, up), (make a,
take a) journey, walk.
see GREEK for 3984
πορεύομαι
v.
I travel, journey, go
πορεύω poreuō 153x
also listed as a deponent, πορεύομαι, to go, pass from one place to another, Mt. 17:27; 18:12; to go away, depart, Mt. 24:1; 25:41; Jn. 14:2, 3; trop. to go away, depart, from life, to die, Lk. 22:22; to go, pass on one’s way, journey, travel, Mt. 2:8, 9; Lk. 1:39; 2:41; πορεύομαι ὀπίσω, to go after, to become a follower or partisan, Lk. 21:8; or, to pursue after, be devoted to, 2 Pet. 2:10; from the Hebrew, to go or proceed in any way…
Read the full entry →Verb-INI-3S — Verb · imperfect · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singularimperfect no voice stated indicative — a continuing action in past time.
V-INI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
153 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 56 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 153 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 443 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„καὶ ὁ ποταμὸς ὁ τρίτος Τίγρις, οὗτος ὁ πορευόμενος κατέναντι Ἀσσυρίων.“ τρίτη ἐστὶν ἀρετὴ σωφροσύνη, ἀντιστατοῦσα τῇ κατευθύνειν δοκούσῃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην ἀσθένειαν ἡδονῇ·
Ἰάκωβος δὲ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν στελλόμενος ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς κατὰ γάμον τῆς Λαβάνου θυγατρὸς τοῦ ἐκείνης ἀδελφοῦ, ἐπιτρέψαντος Ἰσάκου τὸν γάμον διὰ τὸ πείθεσθαι τοῖς βουλήμασι τῆς γυναικὸς διὰ τῆς Χαναναίας ἐπορεύετο καὶ διὰ τὸ πρὸς τοὺς ἐπιχωρίους…
λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…
ἔχεις ἔτους λδ Παχὼνς η ἃς Πᾶσις Ἰροβάστιος θρίσσας ρ δραχμῶν μ Θῶυθ γ πορευομένου σου πρὸς Ἀπολλώνιον θρίσσας σ δραχμῶν π Χοίαχ ζ κατὰ τὴν παρὰ Φιλίσκου ἐπιστολὴν
δὲ τὸν ὀνηλάτην εἰς Ἡρακλήους πόλιν δοὺς αὐτῶι ἐφόδιον δραχμὰς δ· οὐ γὰρ ἠβούλετο πορεύεσθαι, ἂν μὴ ἐφόδιον λάβηι.
προσάγγελμα Ὥρωι φυλακίτηι παρὰ Διοσκουρίδου. ἔτους ζ μηνὸς Θῶυθ β. πορευομένου μου ἐκ Κροκοδίλων πόλεως εἰς Φιλαδέλφειαν
The Greek word σύν (sun) is a preposition meaning 'with' or 'together with,' indicating association, companionship, or inclusion. It is used with the dative case and appears frequently in the New Testament, especially in the writings of Luke and Paul. Notably, it conveys a closer relationship than other similar prepositions. Examples include phrases like 'σὺν Χριστῷ' (with Christ) and 'σὺν ἐμοί' (with me).
σύν (old Att. ξύν),
prep. c. dat.,
expressing association, fellowship and inclusion. It gradually gave way to μετά, c. gen. (cf. LS, s.v.; Bl., § 41, 3), and is therefore comparatively infrequent in NT, being rare in Mt4, Mk6, Jo3, and elsewhere (exx. Ja 1:11, II Pe 1:18) only in Lk (Gosp. and Ac) and Paul. With, together with: of companionship and association, Lk 2:13, Jo 21:3, Ac 10:23, al.; εἶναι σύν τινι, Lk 7:12, Ac 4:13, Phl 1:23, al.; of partisanship, Ac 4:13; οἱ σύν τινι (ὄντες), of attendants, companions or colleagues, Read the full entry →
σύν [the older form ξύν is still found in some edd. in composition (as ξυμ-βαίνω, 1 Pet. iv. 12 Rec***; see L. and S. 5. v. init.; cf. 3, o,s)], a preposition; it is never used in the Apocalypse, rarely by Matthew [some four times (texts vary) ], Mark [some five times, or John (three times) ], (who prefer μετά), more frequently by Luke ΄, συν [(Gospel and Acts) about 79 times] and Paul [about 39 times ; on the comparative frequency of these prepp. in the classics, see L. and S.s. v. ad init.]. It takes the Dative after it, and denotes accompaniment and fellowship, whether of action, or of belief, or of condition and experience; (acc. to the grammarians [ef. Donaldson, New Crat.§181; Kriiger §68, 13,1; Kihner ii. p.438]; W. 391 (366), a fellowship far closer and more intimate than that expressed by perd, although in the N. T. this distinction is much oftener neglected than observed).…
Read the full entry →συν. This ‘‘aristocrat” among the prepositions as compared with ἐν the ‘‘ maid of all work” is comparatively rare in the NT, having given place, as it did in Attic Greek, to μετά c. gen. (cf. Blass Gr. p. 132). (1) For its general meaning “‘with,” either ‘‘ along with” or ‘‘in addition to,’’we may note—P Tebt I. 438 (B.C. 118) παρεγενήθημεν els ἀπάντησιν σὺν τῶι τῆς κώμης κωμάρχωι [καί] τινων τῶν πρεσβυτέρων τῶν [γ]εωργῶν, “να came to meet him together with the -komarch of the village and some of the elders of the cultivators’ (Edd.), i. 13} (B.C. 114) ἐφοδεύοντός μου σὺν “Qpwr κω(μάρχηι) καὶ ΠΠατάνι. . . [[τὰ ἐν περὶ τὴν κώμην χωματικὰ ἔργα, “as I was inspecting, in company with Horus the komarch and Patanis, the embankment works near the village ’’ (Edd.), 25, 207 (B.c. 113) memépp(a>pelv] ᾿Αράχθην σὺν Tots κωμογραμματεῦσι ἐσόμενον μέχρι TOU με παραγενέσθαι, “T, have sent Arachthes to…
Read the full entry →σύν (sun) — with.
σύν [ῠ],
old Attic dialect ξύν; Boeotian dialect σούν [Refs 3rd c.BC+];
__A σ. ἡρώων [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—with. The form ξύν rarely occurs in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Ionic dialect verse we find ξύν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; in early Ionic dialect Prose (including Inscrr.,[Refs 6th c.BC+] is only found in ξυνίημι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in the late Ionic of [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; in Aeolic dialect and Doric dialect it is rare, ξυνοίκην [Refs 7th c.BC+]; elsewhere Doric dialect σύν, [Refs 6th c.BC+] and becomes usual towards the end; after [Refs 5th c.BC+]; otherwise, of Attic dialect Prose writers [Refs 5th c.BC+] a few times in compounds; codices [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 5th c.BC+] is very frequently; in Trag. both forms occur. The preposition σύν gradually gave way to μετά with genitive, so that whereas [Refs 4th c.BC+] with genitive, the proportions in [Refs 5th c.BC+]…
σύν
sun
a primary preposition denoting union; with or together (but much
closer than 3326 or 3844), i.e. by association, companionship,
process, resemblance, possession, instrumentality, addition,
etc.:--beside, with. In composition it has similar applications,
including completeness.
see GREEK for 3326
see GREEK for 3844
σύν
Prep.
with
σύν syn 128x
with, together with, Mt. 25:27; 26:35; 27:38; attendant on, 1 Cor. 15:10; besides, Lk. 24:21; with, with the assistance of, 1 Cor. 5:4; with, in the same manner as, Gal. 3:9; εἶναι σύν τινι, to be with any one, to be in company with, accompany, Lk. 2:13; 8:38; to be on the side of, be a partisan of any one, Acts 4:13; 14:4; οἱ σύν τινι, those with any one, the companions of any one, Mk. 2:26; Acts…
Read the full entry →σύν prep. with dat., Lat. cum
along with, in company with, together with, δεῦρ᾽ ἤλυθε σὺν Μενελάῳ Il.
with collat. notion of help, σὺν θεῷ with God's help or blessing, (the God being conceived as standing with one), Hom., etc.; σὺν θεῷ εἰρημένον spoken as by inspiration, Hdt.: so, σὺν δαίμονι, σὺν Διί, σὺν Ἀθήνῃ Il.; so also, σύν τινι εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι to be with another, i. e. on his side, of his party, Xen.; οἱ σύν τινι any one's friends, followers, id. Xen.
endued with, ἄκοιτις σὺν μεγάλῃ ἀρετῇ Od.: of things that belong or are attached to a person, στῆ σὺν δουρί Il.; σκῆπτρον, σὺν τῷ ἔβη id. Il.; αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι id. Il. (here, in attic, the σύν is often omitted).
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
131 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 128 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 82 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
χρόνος γὰρ οὐκ ἦν πρὸ κόσμου, ἀλλ’ ἢ σὺν αὐτῷ γέγονεν ἢ μετ’ αὐτόν·
τῆς μὲν οὖν ἐπὶ τῷ φόνῳ τιμωρίας αὐτὸν ἠφίει θυσίαν ἐπιτελέσαντα καὶ διʼ αὐτῆς ἱκετεύσαντα μὴ λαβεῖν ὀργὴν αὐτῷ χαλεπωτέραν, ἐπάρατον δʼ αὐτὸν ἐτίθει καὶ τοὺς ἐγγόνους αὐτοῦ τιμωρήσεσθαι κατὰ τὴν ἑβδόμην ἠπείλησε γενεάν, καὶ τῆς γῆς αὐτὸν ἐκείνης…
Τοὺς δὲ ἀπεσταλμένους ἀφ̓ ἡμῶν Κλαύδιον Ἔφηβον καὶ Οὐαλέριον Βίτωνα σὺν καὶ Φορτουνάτῳ ἐν εἰρήνῃ μετὰ χαρᾶς ἐν τάχει ἀναπέμψατε πρὸς ἡμᾶς, ὅπως θᾶττον τὴν εὐκταίαν καὶ ἐπιποθήτην ἡμῖν εἰρήνην καὶ ὁμόνοιαν ἀπαγγέλλωσιν, εἰς τὸ τάχιον καὶ ἡμᾶς χαρῆναι…
Σχώτου ἱερεῖ Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης, παρακεχωρηκέναι αὐτῶι Ἁρσιήσει τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων
τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεῦς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξαντο Ἑτπεσοῦχος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ὠνούμενοι οἱ πριάμενοι. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα.
τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-DPM — Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
P-DPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The Greek word ἤδη (i.e., *ēdē*) is an adverb meaning 'now' or 'already.' It is used in the New Testament to indicate a present time or state, as seen in verses like Matthew 3:10 and Romans 1:10. The word can also imply immediacy or logical proximity, with variations such as 'νῦν... ἤδη' (now already) and 'ἤδη ποτέ' (now at length).
ἤδη, adv., [fr. Hom. down; on deriv. see Vanitek p. 745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. everywh. of time, now, already, (Lat. jam): Mt. iii. 10; v. 28; xiv.15; Mk. iv. 37; ΧΙ. 11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 T WH Trtxt., L Tr mrg. br.]; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51; xix. 28 (that all things were now finished and that nothing further remained for him to do or to suffer); Acts xxvii. 9; Ro. xiii. 11 (that it is already time to wake up and indulge no longer in sleep); 1 Co. iv. 8, and often; νῦν... ἤδη, now already (Lat. jam nunc): 1 Jn. iv. 3; ἤδη ποτέ, now at last, at length now: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. Phil. iv. 10. Syn. see ἄρτι, fin.]
ἤδη. For the idea of ‘logical proximity and immediateness ”’ (cf. Baumlein Griech. Partikeln, p. 138 ff.) which underlies this word and is perhaps to be seen in 1 Cor 67 (cf. Ellicott ad /.), we may cite the common use of the adverb in magical incantations, e.g. P Par 574128 (iii/A.p.) (= Selectzons, p. 114) ἔξελθε, δαῖμον, .. . καὶ ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ S(c)i(va) ἄρτι ἄρτι ἤδη, P Lond 121978 (iii/A.p.) (ΞΞ 1. p. 96) ἐν [τ]ῇ ἄρτι ὥρᾳ ἤδη ἤδη ταχὺ ταχύ: see also Deissmann ZS, p. 289, Archiv i. p. 426. Other examples of the word are P Fay 109! (early i/A.D.) τοὺς τρεῖς στατῆρες (/. -ας) ods εἴρηκέ σοι Σέλευκος δῶναί por ἤδη δὸς Κλέωνι, ‘the three staters which S. told you to give me, now give to C.,” P Ryl II. 7748 (a.p. 192) κα[ὶ] ὀφείλει στεφῆναι, ἤδη yap ἡ ἀρχὴ ἀδιάπτωτός ἐστιν τῇ πόλί(ει), ‘and he ought to be crowned, for the office is now secured to the city” (Edd.). For ἤδη οὖν see P…
Read the full entry →ἤδη (ēdē) — already.
ἤδη,
adverb:
1. already, by this time, νὺξ ἤ. τελέθει 'tis already night, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with numerals, ἤ. γὰρ τρίτον ἔτος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἦν δ᾽ ἦμαρ ἤ. δεύτερον[Refs]
2. forthwith, immediately, φρονέω δὲ διακρινθήμεναι ἤ. Ἁργείους καὶ Τρῶας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στείχοις ἂν ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤδη.. στέλλεσθ; [Refs]; μετὰ τοῦτ᾽ ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤ. ποτέ now at length, Mitteis [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; on the verso of a letter, urgent, immediate, PCair. Zen.154 [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἤ. ἤ. ταχὺ ταχύ [Refs]
3. opposed to to the future or past, actually, now, οὐκ ὄναρ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαρ ἤ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἱ μὲν τάχ᾽, οἱ δ᾽ ἐσαῦθις, οἱ δ᾽ ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ τάχ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἤ. χάρις present…
ἤδη
ede
apparently from 2228 (or possibly 2229) and 1211; even now:--already,
(even) now (already), by this time.
see GREEK for 2228
see GREEK for 2229
see GREEK for 1211
ἤδη
Adv
now, already
ἤδη ēdē 62x
before now, now, already, Mt. 3:10; 5:28; ἤδη ποτέ, at length, Rom. 1:10; Phil. 4:10
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἰ δέ τις ἐθελήσειε γυμνοτέροις χρήσασθαι τοῖς ὀνόμασιν, οὐδὲν ἂν ἕτερον εἴποι τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον εἶναι ἢ θεοῦ λόγον ἤδη κοσμοποιοῦντος·
ἤδη μὲν οὖν καὶ πρότερον διενοήθην, ὅτε τὸν πόλεμον συνέγραφον, δηλῶσαι τίνες ὄντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ τίσι χρησάμενοι τύχαις ὑφʼ οἵῳ τε παιδευθέντες νομοθέτῃ τὰ πρὸς εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ἄσκησιν ἀρετῆς πόσους τε πολέμους ἐν μακροῖς…
ἡμῶν μέν: ἀλλ̓ ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως εἰς τέλος ἀπώλεσαν αὐτὴν λαβόντος ἤδη τοῦ Μωϋσέως.
πρὸς αὐτοὺς περὶ τιμῆς … … σοι πλῆθός τι εἰς ρν δέλφακας διὰ τὸ ἤδη ἐκ … ναι ἕως λ τοῦ Παχώνς· καὶ ἀπόστειλον πε … … ων ἐν
τοῦ παλαιοῦ, ὄξους α, εἰ δὲ μὴ ὑπάρχει τοῦ παλαιοῦ, τοῦ νέου, εἰ ἔστιν ἤδη χρηστόν. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους γ, Μεσορὴ ζ.
μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους … ἐνηνοχότων ἐν τοῖς μάλιστʼ ἀναγκαιοτάτοις καιροῖς
δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.
δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),
post-positive conjunctive particle;
copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →
δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…
Read the full entry →δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…
Read the full entry →δέ (de) — then.
δέ,
but: adversative and copulative Particle,
I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. without preceding μέν,
II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. copulative,
II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…
δέ
de
a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,
etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).
δέ
Cj.
but, on the other hand, and
δέ de 2x
a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6
δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.
δέ is often redundant,
to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.
to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.
POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
ha: The fifth letter of the Hebrew alphabet; transliterated in this Encyclopedia as "h." It came also to be used for the number 5. For name, etc., see ALPHABET.
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as mē), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.
οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),
[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]
neg. particle,
not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);
absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.
οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…
Read the full entry →ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…
Read the full entry →οὐ (ou) — no.
οὐ,
the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]
I. as the negative of single words,
II. as the negative of the sentence.
I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…
οὐ
ou
ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)
ouch ookh
a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or
not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +
nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also
3364, 3372.
see GREEK for 3361
see GREEK for 3364
see GREEK for 3372
οὐ
Neg.prt.
no, not
οὐ ou 1x
negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar
Particle-N — Particle · negativeparticle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative
1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…
ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.
ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.
δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου
ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς
ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ
The Greek word μακράν is the feminine accusative form of μακρός, meaning 'far' or 'a long way.' It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, often indicating physical or metaphorical distance, such as in Luke 15:20 and Ephesians 2:13. The word can also imply a sense of remoteness or alienation.
μακράν (prop. fem. acc. of the adj. μακρός, sc. ὁδόν, a long way [W. 230 (216); B. § 131, 12]), adv., Sept. for pin, [fr. Aeschyl. down]; far, a great way: absol., ἀπέχειν, Lk. xv. 20; of the terminus to which, far hence, ἐξαποστελῶ σε, Acts xxii. 21; with ἀπό twos added, Mt. viii. 30; Lk. vii. 6 [T om. ἀπό]; Jn. xxi. 8; τὸν Oedv... od μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα, i. 6. who is near every one of us by his power and influence (so that we have no need to seek the knowledge of him from without), Acts xvii. 27; of εἰς μακράν [cf. W. 415 (387)] those that are afar off, the inhabitants of remote regions, i. e. the Gentiles, Acts ii. 39, ef. Is. ii. 2 sqa.; Zech. vi. 15. metaph. οὐ μακρὰν ef ἀπὸ τῆς Bac. τοῦ θεοῦ, but little is wanting for thy reception into the kingdom of God, or thou art almost fit to be a citizen in the divine kingdom, Mk. xii. 34; of ποτὲ ὄντες μακμάν (opp. to οἱ…
Read the full entry →μακρός is used of t#2me in P Giss I. 414? (beg. οἵ Hadrian’s reign) ὑπὸ THs μακρᾶς ἀποδημίας τὰ ἡμέτερα] πα[ντ]άπασιν ἀμεληθέντα τυγχ[άνει, ‘owing to our long absence from home our affairs came to be altogether neglected’’: cf. Preisigke 3025 5 (B.c. 149-8 or 137-6) μακ[ρὸν ἂν εἴη] παραγραφή, ‘“‘longae possessionis (longi temporis) praescriptio,’’ In a tract on medical training, Ger/. Avass. Texte ili. p. 22ff. Col. 2, 7ff., it is laid down: Se... τοὺς νέους ἐξ ἀρχῆς συνασκεῖν τοῖς ἀνα[γ]καιοτέροις πρ]άγμασιν τοῦ βίου βραχέος ὄντ[ο]ς καὶ τῆς τέχνης μακρῆς, ὥς φησιν ὁ Ἱπποκράτης. The reference is to stature in P Lond 1158® tions, e.g. P ἈΝ] 11. 1534 (A.D. 138-161) μέσος μελίχρῳς μακροπρόσωπος, “of medium height, with a fair comIn MGr the word has changed…
Read the full entry →μακράν (makran) — far.
μακράν,
Ionic dialect μακρήν, accusative feminine of μακρός used as adverb, far, μ. ἀνωτέρω θακῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; μ. λελειμμένος left far behind,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὔργον οὐ μ. λέγεις the business you speak of is not far to seek, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with genitive, far from, βαρβάρου χθονός [Refs 5th c.BC+] to a greater distance, [Refs 5th c.BC+] as far as possible, with genitive loci, [Refs]
2. μακρὰν λέγειν speak at length, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. of Time, long, μ. ζῆν, ἀναμένειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ μ. shortly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but, not at length, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
μακρός
makran
feminine accusative case singular of 3117 (3598 being implied); at a
distance (literally or figuratively):--(a-)far (off), good (great) way
off.
see GREEK for 3117
see GREEK for 3598
μακράν
Adv
far away
μακράν acc. fem. of μακρός used as adv. a long way, far, far away, Aesch., Soph., etc.; τοὖργον οὐ μ. λέγεις the business you speak of is not far to seek, Soph.:—c. gen. far from, Eur.:—comp., μακροτέραν to a greater distance, Thuc., Xen.; Sup., ὅτι μακροτάτην as far as possible, c. gen. loci, Xen.
μακρὰν λέγειν to speak at length, Aesch., Soph.
of Time, long, μ. ζῆν, ἀναμένειν Soph.; οὐ μ. Lat. brevi, Eur.; so, οὐκ ἐς μακρήν Hdt., etc.
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 33 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀποδεῖ γὰρ τὰ μιμήματα τῶν ἀρχετύπων, τὰ δ’ ἀπὸ τῶν μιμημάτων γραφόμενα καὶ πλαττόμενα πολὺ μᾶλλον, ἅτε μακρὰν ἀφεστῶτα τῆς ἀρχῆς·
ὁ δὲ τοιούτου πάλιν ἐκ μεταβολῆς τῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ βασκάνου πειραθεὶς Ἀβιμελέχου τότε μὲν ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν λεγομένην Φάραγγα χωρίον οὐ μακρὰν Γεράρων, ὀρύσσοντι δʼ αὐτῷ φρέαρ ποιμένες ἐπιπεσόντες εἰς μάχην ἐχώρησαν κωλύοντες τὸ ἔργον, καὶ μὴ βουληθέντος…
τοὺς δὲ ἑτέρους λίθους τοὺς φερομένους ἀπὸ τῆς ξηρᾶς τοὺς μὲν ἀπέβαλλον, τοὺς δὲ ἐτίθουν εἰς τὴν οἰκοδομήν: ἄλλους δὲ κατέκοπτον καὶ ἔρριπτον μακρὰν ἀπὸ τοῦ πύργου.
τον ἀσθενεῖς τὰς ὄψεις, Θέωνα δὲ δημοσίαις χρείαις προσευκαιρεῖν το … … σύμπαν εἰς μακρὰν … … … ς τοῦ γένους … προσευκαιρεῖν ταῖς αὐτῆς οἰκονομίαις … ἕτερον τ
ἐν ᾗ συνήλιξα αὐτοῦ διαγραφήν. ταύτην αὐτῷ ἀναδώσεις. ἔγραψα Ὀλύμπῳ δοῦναί σοι τὴν δαπάνην μακρὰν ἀπὸ σοῦ ἣν πεποίησαι εἰς τὴν μητέρα μου. εἰσὶ δραχμαὶ υιε … … μου
δὲ χεῖρόν ἐστιν ὕβρεως ἀνηκέστου. πολλάκις οὖν, κύριε, βουλόμενοι ἐκδικίας τυχεῖν, ἀποροῦμεν διὰ τὸ μακρὰν εἶναι τοῦ ἐνθάδε δικαίου. ὧν ἐστιν Πτολεμαῖος υἱὸς Πάππου τινὸς γεγυμνασιαρχηκότος ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ
ἀπέχω (apechō) is a Greek verb meaning to hold back or keep off, to have in full, or to be distant. It is used in various contexts, from receiving a reward (as in Matthew 6:2, 5, 16) to abstaining from actions (as in Acts 15:29). The word is built from the prefix ἀπ- (away) and ἔχω (to have). Lexicons note its use in both a transitive and intransitive sense, but they do not show significant disagreement.
ἀπ-έχω,
[in LXX chiefly for רחק;]
trans.,
to hold back, keep off;
to have in full, to have received (on the "punctiliar" force of the compound, v. M, Pr., 109, 247): c. acc., Mt 6:2, 5, 16, Lk 6:24, Phl 4:18, Phm 15 (for illustr. from π., where it is used in receipts, v. Deiss., BS, 229; LAE, 110 f.; MM, s.v.); impers., ἀπέχει (Field, Notes, 39), it is enough: Mk 14:41.
ἀπέχω. Deissmann (BS p. 229 and LAE p. τὸ ἢ.) has already shown how much light is thrown on the NT use of this word (Mt 6% 16 Phil 418) by the papyri and ostraca. There it 4s constantly found in the sense of *‘I have received,” as a technical expression in drawing up a receipt. Consequently in the Sermon on the Mount we are led to understand ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν, ‘they can Sign the receipt of their reward: their right to receive the reward is realised, prectsely as if they had already given a receipt for it” (BS p. 229). To the almost contemporary instances of this usage which Deissmann gives, BGU II. 5845% (A.D. 44) Kal ἀπέχω τὴν συνκεχωρημένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ πλήρους, and 2. 6125: (A.D. 57) ἀπέχω παρ᾽ ὑμῶν τὸν φόρον τοῦ ἐλα[ι]ουργίου, ὧν ἔχετέ [po]u ἐν μισθώσει, we may add a few exx. which might be multiplied almost indefinitely : P Par 523 (B.c. 163-2) ἀπέχι παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ τιμῆς…
Read the full entry →ἀπέχω (apechō) — to have in full.
ἀπέχω,
future ἀφέξω, and [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist ἀπέσχον:— keep off or away from, αἴ κεν τυδέος υἱὸν ἀπόσχη Ἰλίου ἱρῆς[Refs 8th c.BC+]; κληῖδες ἀπ᾽ ὤμων αὐχέν᾽ ἔχουσιν the collar-bone parts the neck from the shoulders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Εὐβοίης ἀπέχειν.. αἶγας Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. with dative person, τοι.. χεῖρας ἀφέξω[Refs 8th c.BC+]
3. with a preposition, ἀ. φρένα περισσῶν παρὰ φωτῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
4. c.accusative only, keep off or away, σκοτεινὸν ἀ. ψόγον[Refs 5th c.BC+]
5. οὐδὲν ἀπέχει with infinitive, nothing hinders, debars one from doing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἀπέχω
apecho
from 575 and 2192; (actively) to have out, i.e. receive in full;
(intransitively) to keep (oneself) away, i.e. be distant (literally or
figuratively):--be, have, receive.
see GREEK for 575
see GREEK for 2192
ἀπέχω
v.
I have in full, am far, it is enough
ἀπέχω apechō 19x
trans. to have in full what is due or is sought, Mt. 6:2, 5, 16; Lk. 6:24; Phil. 4:18; to have altogether, Phlm. 15; hence, it is enough, Mk. 14:41; intrans. to be distant, Lk. 7:6; to be estranged, Mt. 15:8; Mk. 7:6, mid. to abstain from, Acts 14:20
ἀπέχω to keep off or away from, τινά or τί τινος Il.: absol. to keep off, Eur.
to keep apart, part, κληῖδες ἀπ᾽ ὤμων αὐχέν᾽ ἔχουσιν the collar-bones part the neck from the shoulders, Il.
Mid., ἀπὸ χεῖρας ἔχεσθαί τινος (in tmesi) to hold one's hands off or away from, Od.: also, ἀπέχεσθαί τινος to hold oneself off a thing, abstain or desist from it, Hom., Hdt., etc.
c. inf., ἀπέχεσθαι ποιεῖν or μὴ ποιεῖν τι to abstain from doing a thing, Thuc., etc.
intr. in Act. to be away or far from, c. gen. loci, id. Thuc.; also, ἀπ. ἀπὸ Βαβυλῶνος, etc., Hdt.: absol. to be distant, Xen.
of actions, to be far from, ἀπεῖχον τῆς ἐξευρέσιος were far from the discovery, Hdt.; πλεῖστον ἀπ. τοῦ ποιεῖν to be as far as possible from doing…
Verb-PAP-GSM — Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
V-PAP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Τοιοῦτος μὲν ὁ βίος τῶν ἐν ἀρχῇ μὲν ἀκακίᾳ καὶ ἁπλότητι χρωμένων, αὖθις δὲ κακίαν ἀντ’ ἀρετῆς προτιμώντων [ὧν ἄξιον ἀπέχεσθαι].
Ὁ δὴ τοίνυν θεὸς τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα τῶν μὲν ἄλλων φυτῶν ἐκέλευε γεύεσθαι, τοῦ δὲ τῆς φρονήσεως ἀπέχεσθαι, προειπὼν ἁψαμένοις ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ ὄλεθρον γενησόμενον.
ἀπέχεσθαι οὖν δεῖ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν τῶν πονηρῶν, ἵνα ἀποσχόμενοι ζήσητε τῷ θεῷ.
Μεσουήριος τὸν ὑπάρχοντα μοι μύλον θηβαϊκὸν σὺν τραπέζῃ καὶ κώπῃ τοῦτον τοιοῦτον ἀναπόρριφον καὶ ἀπέχω τὴν τιμὴν καὶ βεβαιῶ σοι πάσῃ βεβαιώσει καθὼς πρόκιται. ἔγραψεν ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ Κόραξ Ἀπολλωνίου
Ἀπολλώνιος Δημητρίου Ψεναμοῦνι γεωργῷ χαίρειν. ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ τὸ ἐκφόριον τοῦ διεληλυθότος τετάρτου ἔτους οὗ γεωργεῖς μου κλήρου περὶ τὸ
Ἀρτεμιδώρου Χαιρήμονι Σαταβοῦτος χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ πεπρακέναι σοι ὄνον θήλειαν λευκὴν ταύτην τοιαύτην ἀναπόρριφον καὶ ἀπέχω τὴν συνπεφωνημένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ πλήρους ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑξήκοντα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ξ. … ν
The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.
ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),
prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),
[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]
from (i.e. from the exterior).
Of separation and cessation;
of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;
in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;
of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,
ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…
Read the full entry →ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…
Read the full entry →ἀπό (apo) — away from.
ἀπό,
Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit
__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]
__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…
ἀπό
apo
a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various
senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X
here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),
from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as
a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,
completion, reversal, etc.
ἀπό
Prep.
from, away from
ἀπό apo 646x
pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality
ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.
prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.
of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.
of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.
in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.
OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.
OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.
Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ
ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word οἰκία (lemma: oikia) refers to a house or dwelling, often used to denote a household or family. It is derived from οἶκος and is frequently found in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 2:11 and 2 Corinthians 5:1, where it can also metaphorically refer to the body as the dwelling of the soul. The distinction between οἰκία and οἶκος is noted, with the former typically indicating the dwelling itself and the latter encompassing the entire estate.
οἰκία, -ας, ἡ
(< οἶκος),
[in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for בַּיִת;]
a house, dwelling: Mt 2:11 7:24-27, Mk 1:29, al.; ἐν οἰκίᾳ (= cl. κατ ̓ οἰκίαν), at home, Lk 8:27; εἰς οἰ., II Jo 10; οἰ, c. gen. pers., usually has the art. (Mt 8:14, al., but cf. οἶκος and v. Bl., § 46, 9); ἡ οἰ. τ. πατρός μου, Jo 14:2. Metaph.,
οἰκία, -as, ἡ, (οἶκος), Sept. for m3, [fr. Hdt. down], a house; a. prop. an inhabited edifice, a dwelling: Mt. ii. 11; vii. 24-27; Mk.i. 29; Lk. xv. 8; Jn. xii. 3; Acts iv. 34; 1 Co. xi. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 20, and often; οἱ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ se. ὄντες, Mt. v. 15; οἱ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας with gen. of pers., Phil. iv. 22; ἡ οἰκία τοῦ (πατρός pov) θεοῦ, i. e. heaven, Jn. xiv. 2; of the body as the habitation of the soul, 2 Co. v. 1. b. the inmates of a house, the family : Mt. xii. 25; ἡ οἰκία τινός, the household, the family of any one, Jn. iv. 53; 1 Co. xvi. 15 [ef. W. § 58, 4; Β. § 129, 8a.]; univ. for persons dwelling in the house, Mt. x. 13. Ὁ: property, wealth, goods, [ οἷ. Ταῦ. res familiaris]: τινός, Mt. xxiii. 14 (13) Ree. [ef. Wetst. ad loc.]; Mk. xii. 40; Lk. xx. 47; so οἶκος in Hom. (as Od. 2, 237 κατέδουσι βιαίως οἶκον ᾿Οδυσσῆος, cf. 4, 318), in Hdt. 8, 53 and in Attic; Hebr. 973, Gen. xlv.18…
Read the full entry →οἰκία. For οἰκία, ‘‘a house,” in the ordinary sense of the term, it is sufficient to cite such passages as P Petr IT. 12(1)” (B.C. 241) ἐνωικοδομηκότας τὰς θύρας τῶν οἰκιῶν, ‘built up the doors of the houses,” zd. I. 1410 (a Will—s.c. 237) Katahipmavw . . [τὴν élv ᾿Αλεξανδρείαι οἰκίαν ἐμοὶ ὑπάρχουσαν, Ρ Ryl IT. 12535 (a.p. 28-0) ἔριψεν ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ μου τὴν πυξίδα κενήν, “he threw the box empty into my house ’’ (Edd.), P Oxy I. 99° (A.D. 55) μέρος ἥμισυ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ μητρικῆς οἰκία[ς] τριστέγου, “ one half of a three-storied house inherited from his mother,” and BGU I. 2255 (A.D. 114) (= Selections, p. 76) ἀνέβη εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν pov. In phrases similar to the last, the word οἰκία is sometimes omitted, e.g. P Oxy III. 4724 (c. A.D. 130) ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ τε kal τοῦ κληρονομεῖν μέλλοντος υἱοῦ προῆλQe, ‘but it was from the house of himself and his son and future heir that he came forth’’…
Read the full entry →οἰκία (oikia) — home.
οἰκί-α,
Ionic dialect οἰκίη, Cretan dialect and Locrian dialect ϝοικία, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—ἡ, building, house, dwelling, [Refs 5th c.BC+] at home, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔτυχεν ἐπὶ τῆς οἰ. was at home, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] as house to set of apartments or room, τᾶν οἰκιᾶν τιμὰν κομιζέσθω τῶ οἴκω ἑκάστω δύο μνᾶς [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. in Attic dialect law, οἶκος was distinguished from οἰκία, the former being the property left at a person's death, his estate, the latter the dwelling-house only, as stated by [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. distinguished from συνοικία, as one's own apartments from those let out to lodgers, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
οἰκία
oikia
from 3624; properly, residence (abstractly), but usually (concretely)
an abode (literally or figuratively); by implication, a family
(especially domestics):--home, house(-hold).
see GREEK for 3624
οἰκία, ας, ἡ
n.f.
a house, household
οἰκία oikia 93x
a house, dwelling, an abode, Mt. 2:11; 7:24, 27; trop. the bodily abode of the soul, 2 Cor. 5:1; meton. a household, family, Mt. 10:13; 12:25; meton. goods, property, means, Mt. 23:13
οἰκία οἰκία, ἡ, οἰκέω a building, house, dwelling, Hdt.
a household, domestic establishment, Plat.; οἰκίας δύο ᾤκει, i. e. he kept two establishments, Dem.
the household, i. e. inmates of the house, Lat. familia, Plat.
the house or family from which one is descended, Hdt., attic
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
hous (bayith; oikos, in classical Greek generally "an estate," oikia, oikema (literally, "habitation"), in Ac 12:1, "prison"):
I. CAVE DWELLINGS
II. STONE-BUILT AND MUD/BRICK-BUILT HOUSES
1. Details of Plan and Construction
(1) Corner-Stone
(2) Floor
(3) Gutter
(4) Door
(5) Hinge
(6) Lock and Key
(7) Threshold
(8) Hearth
(9) Window
(10) Roof
2. Houses of More than One Story
(1) Upper Chambers and Stairs
(2) Palaces and Castles
3. Internal Appearance
III. OTHER MEANINGS
LITERATURE
I. Cave Dwellings.
The earliest permanent habitations of the prehistoric inhabitants of Palestine were the natural caves which abound throughout the country. As the people increased and grouped themselves into communities, these abodes were supplemented by systems of artificial caves which, in some cases, developed into extensive burrowings of many adjoining compartments, having…
House
Till their sojourn in Egypt the Hebrews dwelt in tents. They then for the first time inhabited cities (Gen. 47:3; Ex. 12:7; Heb. 11:9). From the earliest times the Assyrians and the Canaanites were builders of cities. The Hebrews after the Conquest took possession of the captured cities, and seem to have followed the methods of building that had been pursued by the Canaanites. Reference is made to the stone (1 Kings 7:9; Isa. 9:10) and marble (1 Chr. 29:2) used in building, and to the internal wood-work of the houses (
The houses of the rural poor in Egypt, as well as in most parts of Syria, Arabia and Persia, are generally mere huts of mud or sunburnt bricks. In some parts of Palestine and Arabia stone is used, and in certain districts caves in the rocks are used as dwellings. (Amos 5:11) The houses are usually of one story only, viz., the ground floor, and often contain only one apartment. Sometimes a small court for the cattle is attached; and in some cases the cattle are housed in the same building, or the live in a raised platform, and, the cattle round them on the ground. (1 Samuel 28:24) The windows are small apertures high up in the walls, sometimes grated with wood. The roofs are commonly but not always flat, and are usually formed of plaster of mud and straw laid upon boughs or…
Is often put for dwelling, residence; and hence the temple, and even the tabernacle, are called the house of God.
The universal mode of building houses in the East, is in the form of a hollow square, with an open court or yard in the center; which is thus entirely shut in by the walls of the house around it. Into this court all the windows open, there being usually no windows towards the street. Some houses of large size require several courts, and these usually communicate with each other. These courts are commonly paved; and in many large houses parts of them are planted with shrubs and trees, Ps 84:3 128:3; they have also, when possible, a fountain in them, often with a jet d’ eau, 2Sa 17:18. It is customary in many houses to extend an awning over the whole court in hot…
95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 94 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 143 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
διὸ καὶ Μωυσῆς φησιν ὅτι „οὐκ ἐάσει τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ὑμῶν πατάξαι“ (Exod.
Ὁ θεὸς οὖν ἀγανακτήσας αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τοῖς τολμήμασι τοὺς μὲν ἠμαύρωσεν, ὡς μὴ δυνηθῆναι τὴν εἴσοδον τὴν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν εὑρεῖν, Σοδομιτῶν δὲ κατέκρινε πάνδημον ὄλεθρον.
ὡς ἐὰν οὖν γνῷς παραγινομένους ἡμᾶς, συνάξεις πάντας τοὺς σοὺς ὑπὸ τὸ στέγος σου, καὶ διασωθήσονται: ὅσοι γὰρ ἐὰν εὑρεθῶσιν ἔξω τῆς οἰκίας, ἀπολοῦνται.
int,1 ἔτους ιϛ, Ἁθὺρ β. ὠνή. Θοτορταῖος Πατῆτος ἀπʼ οἰκίας ᾠκοδομημένης, ἐν ᾗ καμάρα, καὶ αὐλῆς ἥμισυ καὶ θυρώματα, ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς
ἀπὸ λιβὸς μέρει κώμης Μούχεως ἑπταρούρων πήχεις στερεοὺς μέτρῳ βασιλικοὺς τριακοσίους ὧν γείτονες νότου οἰκία Πκώιος ἧς κρατεῖ … , βορρᾶ οἱ λοιποὶ τόποι, ἀπηλιώτου ῥύμη βασιλική, λιβὸς οἱ
ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς ὠνῆς.
πέμπω, transliterated as pempō, means 'to send' and is used in various contexts, such as sending people, messages, or things. It appears in the New Testament to describe actions like sending messengers (e.g., Matthew 22:7) and is often associated with divine sending, as seen with figures like John the Baptist. The word has nuances of dispatching and conducting, and it can also imply sending with a purpose.
πέμπω,
[in LXX chiefly for שׁלח;]
to send;
πέμπω ; fut. πέμψω; 1 aor. ἔπεμψα [on its epistolary use (for the pres. or the pf.) see W. 278 (261); B. 198 (172): Bp. Lehtft. on Phil. ii. (25), 28; Philem. 11]; Pass., pres. πέμπομαι; 1 aor. ἐπέμφθην (Lk. vii. 10) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for nw; to send: twa, absol., one to do something, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. vii. 19; xvi. 24; Jn.i. 22; vii. 18; xiii. 16,20; xx. 21 [Treg. mrg. amooréAX.]; 2 Co. ix. 3; Phil. ii. 23, 28, ete.; τινά or τινάς is omitted where the ptep. is joined to another finite verb, as πέμψας ἀπεκεφάλισε τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην, he sent (a deputy) and beheaded John, Mt. xiv. 10; add, Acts xix. 31; xxiii. 30, (for other exx. see ἀποστέλλω, 1 d.); in imitation of the Hebr. 79 V3 Now (1S. xvi. 20; 2S. xi. 14; xii. 25; 1K. ii. 25) we find πέμψας διὰ τῶν μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ, he sent by his disciples (unless with Fritzsche, and Bornemann, Schol. in Lue. p. lxv., one prefer to take πέμψας absol.…
Read the full entry →πέμπω. It is not necessary to do more than cite a few exx. of this common verb—P Hib I. 5415 (c. B.c. 245) (= Chrest. I. Ῥ. 563) κόμισαι δὲ Kal τὸν ἔριφον παρὰ ᾿Αριστίωνος καὶ πέμψον ἡμῖν, ‘get the kid also from Aristion and send it to me,’ P Par 63: 17(B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p. 18) a 2 πενθέω ἐν τῶι πεμφθέντι σοι Tap ἡμῶν ὑπομνήματι, “in the minute sent to you by us,” P Tebt I. 225 (B.c. 112) πεπομφότες τῆι κα ἐπὶ τὰ σπέρματα, “having sent on the 2151 for the seed,” 26. II. 414° (ii/A.D.) t μὴ ὅτι ἠσθένηκα, πάλαι πεπόνφην cot, “had it not been for the fact that I was ill, I would have sent them to you long ago’’ (Edd.), and P Iand 108f. (iii/A.D.) ἐπένσαμέν σοι ταύτην τὴν ἐπ]ιστολὴν διὰ τῶν φυλάκων [ἐκπορευομένων, ἐπειδὴ δι᾿ ἄλλ]ου οὐ δυνάμεθα πένσαι σοι, with the editor’s note, where there are also collected a number of instances of the dropping of the 24 π, e.g. P Oxy III. 5281…
Read the full entry →πέμπω (pempō) — to send.
πέμπω,
Epic dialect infinitive -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect imperfect πέμπεσκε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future πέμψω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect πεμψῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive πεμψέμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist ἔπεμψα, Epic dialect πέμψα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέπομφα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐπεμπόμφει, Ionic dialect -εε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle (not in early Prose, except in compounds ἀπο-, μετα-, προ-πέμπομαι), future πέμψομαι only falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐπεμψάμην [Refs]:—passive, future πεμφθήσομαι [Refs 1st c.BC+]: aorist ἐπέμφθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. singular perfect πέπεμπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle πεπεμμένος [Refs 4th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἐπέπεμπτο [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—send, frequently of persons, as messengers, spies, etc., [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of troops, [Refs 4th c.BC+] send…
Read the full entry →πέμπω
pempo
apparently a primary verb; to dispatch (from the subjective view or
point of departure, whereas hiemi (as a stronger form of eimi) refers
rather to the objective point or terminus ad quem, and 4724 denotes
properly, the orderly motion involved), especially on a temporary
errand; also to transmit, bestow, or wield:--send, thrust in.
see GREEK for 4724
πέμπω
v.
I send
πέμπω pempō 79x
to send, to despatch on any message, embassy, business, etc., Mt. 2:8; 11:2; 14:10; to transmit, Acts 11:29; Rev. 1:11; to dismiss, permit to go, Mk. 5:12; to send in or among, 2 Thess. 2:11; to thrust in, or put forth, Rev. 14:15, 18
πέμπω to send, despatch, Il., etc.; of a ship, to convey, carry, Od.; c. dupl. acc., ὁδὸν π. τινά to conduct one on his way Soph.
to send forth or away, dismiss, like ἀποπέμπω, to send home, Hom.; χρὴ ξεῖνον παρεόντα φιλεῖν, ἐθέλοντα δὲ πέμπειν, "welcome the coming, speed the parting guest, " Od.
of missiles, to discharge, shoot forth, Hes.
of words, to send forth, utter, Aesch., Soph.
to conduct, convoy, escort, Lat. deduco, Hom., etc.; ὁ πέμπων absol., of Hermes, Soph.:— πομπὴν πέμπειν to conduct a procession, Hdt., Thuc.; π. χορούς Eur., Xen.: in Pass., πέμπεσθαι Διονύσωι to be carried in procession in his honour, Hdt.
to send with one, give as provision for a journey, Od., Hdt., etc.
like ἀναπέμπω, to send up, produce, Soph.
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
79 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 79 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
οὐκ ἂν οὖν ἀφθόνου θεραπείας ὑπαρχούσης υἱὸν ἠξίου πέμπειν, οὗ μάλιστα ἐκήδετο, ἐπὶ πρᾶξιν, ἣν καὶ τῶν εὐτελεστάτων ἄν τις ῥᾳδίως κατώρθωσεν.
οὐδὲ γὰρ πᾶσαν ἐκεῖνος ἔφθη λαβεῖν τὴν ἀναγραφήν, ἀλλὰ μόνα τὰ τοῦ νόμου παρέδοσαν οἱ πεμφθέντες ἐπὶ τὴν ἐξήγησιν εἰς τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρειαν·
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
τόν ποτε ἡγούμενον τόκους ἐτῶν β δραχμὰς ρκ. καὶ τὰς θύρας ἐπιστησάτωσαν οἱ τέκτονες· πέμπω δέ σοι τὰ σχοινία. τὰς δὲ ὠλένας τοῦ ἐλαιουργίου διπλᾶς ποίησον, τὰς δὲ τῶν
ἐκείνου τοῦ μετεώρου ἕως πεντεκαιδεκάτης τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Χύακ, καὶ ἐὰν δύνῃ ἀρτάβην ἐλᾶς πέμψαι α… πέμψεις ἵνα τῶι ἀδελφῶι πέμψωμεν. μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσῃς. ἐὰν ἀποχωρῶ πέμψω πρὸς
τὸν βασιλικὸν διαδέχεσθαι τὴν στρατηγείαν Ἐράσου ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς τοῦ κρατίστου ἡγεμόνος. ἐάν συ δόξῃ πέμψαι αὐτῷ ἐλᾶς ἀρτάβην α καὶ ἰχθύδιον ἐπεὶ χρείαν αὐτοῦ ἔχομεν. πέμψεις ἡμῖν εἰς οἶκον
πρός is a preposition that indicates direction, proximity, or relation. It can be used with the genitive to denote motion from a place, with the dative for local proximity, and with the accusative to express motion towards a place or object. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Acts 27:34 for benefit and Mark 5:11 for proximity.
πρός,
prep. c. gen., dat., acc.
C. gen., of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaph., in the interests of, Ac 27:34 (cf. Page, in l.).
C. dat., of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mk 5:11, Lk 19:37, Jo 18:16 20:11, 12, Re 1:13.
C. acc., of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards.
πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from πρό and the adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius § 381]); it is joined I. with the AccusaTIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denoting direction towards athing, or position and state looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)): it is used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. after verbs of going, departing, running, coming, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xvili. 21; ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [1]. Tr mrg. arépy.]; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. » xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc.; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the ys.; Tr reads mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 Ὁ. below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [Ὁ Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ sub fin.)]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co.…
Read the full entry →πρός reference to place PSI IV. 31178 (iv/A.D.?) πρ]ὸς τὴν Aavitk.ay τῆς κοίλης Dupials. Headlam (on Herodas VII. 123) holds that τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν in Mk 2? ‘‘is surely idiomatic (not vulgar as Moulton thinks) ‘spots which commanded the door’”: cf. Mt 310, Lk 35. For πρός, ‘‘with,” as in Jn ΤΡ, Heb 41%, cf. Epict. iv. 9. 13 πρὸς ὃν οὐδείς ἐστί σου πιθανώτερος (see Sharp Ξε, p. 92). And for the possibility that the difficult πρός in Mk 63, οἷ", 14%, Jn 1}, 1 Jn 1?, is to be explained as an Aramaism, see Rendel Harris Prologue to S. John’s Gospel p. 8f., and Burney Avamaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel p. 28 f. (6) of time = ‘‘for’’ (a time) and no longer—BGU I. 1131? (A.D. 143) βουλόμενος παρεπιδημεῖν πρὸς καιρόν (cf. Lk 818), P Oxy I. 6714 (A.D. 338) πρὸς ὀλίγον εἰσχύει, ‘‘withstands but for a short time” (cf. Jas 4), and P Flor III. 282° (A.D. 520) πρὸς ὅλον χρόνον. (c) of mental…
Read the full entry →πρός (pros) — to/with.
πρός,
preposition, expressing direction,
__A on the side of, in the direction of, hence with genitive, dative, and accusative, from, at, to: Epic dialect also προτί and ποτί, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] usually with accusative, more rarely with dative, and each only once with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—dialectal forms: Doric dialectποτί (which see) and ποί, but Cretan dialect πορτί [Refs], Argive προτ(ί) [Refs 7th c.BC+] πός [Refs 4th c.BC+]., also sometimes in Asia Minor in compounds, see at {ποσάγω},{ποσφέρω}; Aeolic dialect πρός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; πρές [Refs 6th c.AD+]; Pamphylian περτ (ί) [Refs] (With προτί, πρός cf. Sanskrit práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slavonic protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Latin pretium: ποτί (which see) and πός are not cognate) [Refs 4th c.BC+] refers to that from which something…
πρός
pros
a strengthened form of 4253; a preposition of direction; forward to,
i.e. toward (with the genitive case, the side of, i.e. pertaining to;
with the dative case, by the side of, i.e. near to; usually with the
accusative case, the place, time, occasion, or respect, which is the
destination of the relation, i.e. whither or for which it is
predicated):--about, according to , against, among, at, because of,
before, between, (where-)by, for, X at thy house, in, for intent, nigh
unto, of, which pertain to, that, to (the end that), X together, to
(you) -ward, unto, with(-in). In the comparative case, it denotes
essentially the same applications, namely, motion towards, accession
to, or nearness at.
see GREEK for 4253
πρός
Prep.
to, towards, with
πρός pros 700x
from; met. for the benefit of, Acts 27:34; with a dative, near, by, at, by the side of, in the vicinity of, Mk. 5:11; Lk. 19:37; with an accusative, used of the place to which anything tends, to, unto, towards, Mt. 2:12; 3:5, 13; at, close upon, Mt. 3:10; Mk. 5:22; near to, in the vicinity of, Mk. 6:45; after verbs of speaking, praying, answering to a charge, etc., to, Mt. 3:15; 27:14; of place where, with, in, among, by, at, etc., Read the full entry →
πρός prep. with gen., implying motion from a place; with dat., abiding at a place; with acc., motion to a place
WITH GEN.,
of Place, from, from forth, Hom., Soph.
on the side or quarter of, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος islands looking (as it were) from Elis, i. e. towards Elis, Od.; πρὸς τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου ἵδρυται μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Στρύμονος lies more towards (i. e. nearer) the Hellespont than the Strymon, Hdt.; ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο πρὸς Ὀλύνθου Thuc., etc.:—often with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν πρὸς βορέαο, αἱ δ᾽ αὖ πρὸς νότου one looking north wards, the other south wards, Od.; so, οἰκέουσι πρὸς νότου ἀνέμου Hdt., etc.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
732 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 32 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 700 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…
τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,
τούτων οὖν μενόντων τὰ πρὸς κύριον ἁγνῶς, συνευφραίνονται αὐτοῖς σοφία, σύνεσις, ἐπιστήμη, γνῶσις.
r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῆ
παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου
πᾶσι χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διὰ παντὸς εὐημερεῖν. ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-ASM — Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
P-ASM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
φίλος is an adjective and noun meaning 'friend' or 'dear.' It conveys notions of love and friendship, often used in the New Testament to describe close relationships, as seen in verses like Luke 7:6 and John 15:15. The word can also imply being beloved or cherished. There are variations in its usage across different contexts, but no significant disagreements among lexicons.
φίλος, -η, -ον
[in LXX chiefly for רֵעַ, אֹהֵב ;]
pass., beloved, dear (Hom., Eur., al.).
Act., loving, friendly (in cl. less freq. and only in poets): Ac 19:31. As subst., a friend;
masc., ὁ φ.: Lk 7:6 11:5 14:10 15:6 16:9 21:16 23:12, Ac 27:3, III Jo 15; opp. to δοῦλος, Jo 15:15; φ. ἀναγκαῖοι, Ac 10:24; c. gen. subj., Mt 11:19, Lk 7:34 11:6, 8 12:4 14:12 15:29, Jo 11:11 15:13, 14; ὁ φ. τοῦ νυμφίου, Jo 3:29; τ. Καίσαρος (v. Deiss., BS 167; LAE, 382 f.), Jo 19:12; θεοῦ (v. Hort, in l.), Ja 2:23; c. gen. rei, τ, κόσμου, Ja…
φίλος, -7, -ov, fr. Hom. down, friendly [ef. L. and 5. s. v. I. and IL]: φίλον εἶναί τινι, to be friendly to one, wish him well, Acts xix. 31; 1. ὁ φίλος, Sept. for YN, IOs, subst., a friend: Lk. vii. 6; xi. 5; xv. 6; xvi. 9; xxiii. 12; Acts xxvii.3; 3 Jn. 15 (14); joined with συγγενεῖς, Lk. xxi. 16; an associate, opp. to δοῦλος, Jn. xv. 15; φίλοι ἀναγκαῖοι, [A. V.near friends] Lat. necessitate conjuncti, Acts x. 24; φίλε, friend, in kindly address, Lk. xiv. 10; with agen. of the subject, ὁ φίλος τινός, Lk. xi. 6, [8]; xii. 4; xiv. 12; xv. 29; Jn. xi. 11; xv. 18 sq.; spec. he who associates familiarly with one, a companion, Mt. xi. 19; Lk. vii. 34; ὁ @. τοῦ νυμφίου, the rabbinical ;avjw [q.v. in Buxtorf or Levy] (i.e. ‘son of gladness’), one of the bridegroom’s friends who on his behalf asked the hand of the bride and rendered him various services in closing the marriage and celebrating…
Read the full entry →φίλος, ‘*a friend”: Preisigke 68174 (letter of commendation— B.C, 255) πυνθανόμενος δέ σε εἶναι ἐπιε[ιἸκῆ ἠξίωσάν τινές pe τῶν φίλων γράψαι [σο]ς, P Vat A*° (8.6. 168) (= Witkowski*, p. 66) ἀσπάζεσθαι τὴν γυνάϊκα Kal τὰ παιδία Kal τοὺς φίλους, BGU IV. 12098 (8.6. 23) ἡμῶν δὲ φίλου γενομένου ITerexayros, ‘our late friend Petechon,” P Oxy IV. 7427 (B.c. 2) παράδος δέ τινι τῶν φίλων ἀριθμῷ αὐτὰς (sc. δέσμας) ἵνα πάλιν φίίλος ἡμεῖν παραδοῖ ἀσφαλῶς, ‘deliver a few of them (sc. bundles of reeds) to Part VIII.
φίλος (philos) — friendly/friend.
φίλος, η, ον,
also ος, ον [Refs 8th c.BC+] with ῑ at the beginning of a verse, see below].
I. passive, beloved, dear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; frequently with dative, dear to one, μάλα οἱ φ. ἦεν [Refs]; with neuter nouns, φίλε τέκνον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also φίλος for φίλε (Attic dialect, accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+]: genitive added to the vocative, φίλ᾽ ἀνδρῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+] substantive:
I. a φίλος, ὁ, friend, κουρίδιος φίλος, i.e. husband, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φίλοι friends, kith and kin, νόσφιφίλων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. μέγιστος my greatest friend, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φίλοι οἱ ἐγγυτάτω, οἱ ἔγγιστα, [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequently with a genitive, ὁ Διὸς φίλος [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοὺς ἐμαυτοῦ φ., τοὺς τούτων φ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῶν ἐμε̄ν φ.[Refs 5th c.BC+] a friend is another self, [Refs 5th…
φίλος
philos
properly, dear, i.e. a friend; actively, fond, i.e. friendly (still as
a noun, an associate, neighbor, etc.):--friend.
φίλος, η, ον
Adj. & n.f. & n.m.
friendly, a friend
φίλος φίλος, η, ον ι short: but voc. φίλε with ι_ in Hom. pass. loved, beloved, dear, Lat. amicus, carus, Hom., etc.; c. dat. dear to one, id. Hom.; voc. φίλε may be used with neut. nouns, φίλε τέκνον Od.; a gen. was sometimes added to the voc., φίλ᾽ ἀνδρῶν Theocr.; ὦ φίλα γυναικῶν Eur.:—often as Subst., φίλος, a friend, Hom.:—proverb., ἔστιν ὁ φ. ἄλλος αὐτός a friend is another self, Arist.; κοινὰ τὰ τῶν φίλων Plat.:—so in fem. φίλη, a dear one, friend, Lat. amica, Hom., attic:— φίλον, ου, an object of love, Soph.; τὰ φίλτατα one's nearest and dearest, such as wife and children, Trag.
of things, dear, pleasant, welcome, Hom.:—as predic., φίλον ἐστί or γίγνεταί μοι 'tis dear to me, pleases me, Lat. cordi est, id. Hom., Hdt., etc.; εἰ τόδ᾽ αὐτῷ φίλον…
Read the full entry → — → Jesus calls his disciples by this term Joh 15:14,15
→ FALSE FRIENDS
Instances of
Pharaoh's butler was false to Joseph Ge 40:23
Delilah was false to Samson Jud 16:1-20
The Ephraimite's wife Jud 19:1,2
David was false to Joab 1Ki 2:5,6
David was false to Uriah 2Sa 11
Ahithophel was false to David 2Sa 15:12
David's friends were false to David Ps 35:11-16; 41:9; 55:12-14,20,21; 88:8,18
Judas Iscariot Mt 26:48,49
27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 29 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 45 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ πολλάκις καταλιπὼν μὲν ἀνθρώπους συγγενεῖς καὶ φίλους καὶ πατρίδα καὶ εἰς ἐρημίαν ἐλθών, ἵνα τι τῶν θέας ἀξίων κατανοήσω, οὐδὲν ὤνησα, ἀλλὰ σκορπισθεὶς ὁ νοῦς ἢ πάθει δηχθεὶς ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τἀναντία·
περὶ μὲν τούτων, ὡς ἂν ἑκάστοις ᾖ φίλον, οὕτω σκοπείτωσαν.
Ἀβραάμ, ὁ φίλος προσαγορευθείς, πιστὸς εὑρέθη ἐν τῷ αὐτὸν ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τοῖς ῥήμασιν τοῦ θεοῦ.
τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τοῖσἐπεσομένοις ἐξ ἐμοῦ καὶ Ἀπολλωνίας τέκνοις. Ἐπίτροπον δὲ καταλείπω Ἑρμ … φιλον Παμφίλου Φιλωτέρειον Δρύτωνι Παμφίλου ὄντα συγγενῆ, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ Ἐσθλάδου τοῦ Ἐσθλάδου. Ἀλλωι δὲ
ϛ ἔτους ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος, ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης
ϛ ἔτει ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἑκατοντάρχης (i.e., *hekatontarches*) means 'centurion,' derived from the components for 'hundred' and 'leader.' It refers to a commander of a hundred men, commonly appearing in the New Testament, notably in Matthew and Acts. The term has variations in form, such as ἑκατόνταρχος, but all denote the same role.
ἑκατοντάρχης, -ov, 6, (ἕκατον and apyw; on the terminations apyns and ἀρχὸς see the full exposition in W. 61 (60); ef. B. 73 (64); Bornemann, Schol. ad Lue. p. 151 sq.; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 117; WH. App. p. 156 sq-]), a centurion: Mt. viii. [5 and 8 Tdf.],13 GL T Tr WI; [xxvii. 54 ΤΊ; Lk. vii. [2 (?)], 6 TWH; [xxiii. 47 T Tr WH]; Acts x. 1, 22; xxi.32 LT Tr WH; [xxii. 26 LT WH]; xxiv. 23; xxvii. 1,6 L T Tr WH, 11 GLT Tr WH, 31, 43 L T Tr WH; gen. plur. T WH in Acts xxiii. 17, 23. (Aeschyl. ap. Athen. 1 p. 11 d.; Hat. 7, 81; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.). See the foll. word.
ἑκατόνταρχος (hekatontarchos) — centurion.
ἑκᾰτόντ-αρχος, ὁ,
={ἑκατοντάρχης}, [NT+5th c.BC+]
ἑκατοντάρχης ἑκατοντάρχος
hekatontarches
or hekatontarchos hek-at-on'-tar-khos
from 1540 and 757; the captain of one hundred men:--centurion.
see GREEK for 1540
see GREEK for 757
ἑκατοντάρχης, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a centurion
ἑκατοντάρχης ἑκα^τοντ-άρχης, ου, ἄρχω leader of a hundred, Hdt.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
sen-tu'-ri-un: As the name implies, hekatontarches or hekatontarchos, kenturion, Latin centurio, was the commander of a hundred men, more or less, in a Roman legion. Matthew and Luke use the Greek word while Mark prefers the Latin form, as he does in the case of other words, seeing that he wrote primarily for Roman readers. The number of centurions in a legion was 60, that being at all epochs the number of centuries, although the number varied in the cohort or speira. The ordinary duties of the centurion were to drill his men, inspect their arms, food and clothing, and to command them in the camp and in the field. Centurions were sometimes employed on detached service the conditions of which in the provinces are somewhat obscure. Men like Cornelius and Julius (Ac 10:1; 27:1) may have been separated from the legion to which they…
Centurion
A Roman officer in command of a hundred men (Mark 15:39, 44, 45). Cornelius, the first Gentile convert, was a centurion (Acts 10:1, 22). Other centurions are mentioned in Matt. 8:5, 8, 13; Luke 7:2, 6; Acts 21:32; 22:25, 26; 23:17, 23; 24:23; 27:1, 6, 11, 31, 43; 28:16. A centurion watched the crucifixion of our Lord (Matt. 27:54; Luke 23:47), and when he saw the wonders attending it, exclaimed, “Truly this man was the Son of God.” “The centurions mentioned in the New Testament are uniformly spoken of in…
[ARMY]
A Roman officer commanding a hundred soldiers; similar to "captain" in modern times. Several centurions are mentioned with honor in the New Testament, Mr 15:39; Lu 7:1-10; and the first fruits to Christ from the Gentiles was the generous and devout Cornelius, Ac 10:1-48.
21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 20 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἀφ’ οὗ μοι δοκεῖ καὶ Μωυσῆς μετὰ τὴν χιλιάρχων καὶ ἑκατοντάρχων καὶ πεντηκοντάρχων αἵρεσιν ἐπὶ πᾶσι δεκαδάρχους χειροτονεῖν (Exod.
Ἰώδας δὲ καλέσας τοὺς ἑκατοντάρχας ἐκέλευσεν αὐτοὺς ἀπαγαγόντας τὴν Ὀθλίαν εἰς τὴν φάραγγα τὴν Κεδρῶνος ἀνελεῖν αὐτὴν ἐκεῖ·
αὐτοῦ σημαινομένοις αἰτησαμένωι Σαταβοῦτι χρόνον εἰς τὴν ἐπὶ τόπων ἀπόδειξιν ὑπερεθέμην εἰς διάκρισιν Λοκρητίου ἑκατοντάρχου καὶ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ καὶ βασιλικοῦ γραμματέως ὅπως ἐπὶ τοῦ διαλογισμοῦ τὴν διάκρισιν δηλώσωσι τῷ
ελλος ἑκατόνταρχος Πούδεντι κουράτορι πραισίδιου Ἀπι χαίρειν. … ον Πετρωνιανὸν … Πρόκλου ἐχκορ … ἔρρωσθε.
ἀκισκλαρίοις … λοῦσαι στρατιώταις … εἰς κάθαρσιν … ιη κϛ … ποθαιοντος … του ἑκατοντάρχου ἀντληταὶ θ ἀσκοφορίᾳ κ ἀλέσαι κουράτορι β … … λοῦσαι γ
λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.
In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…
Read the full entry →λέγω,
[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]
in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.
In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…
λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…
Read the full entry →λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…
Read the full entry →λέγω (legō) — to say.
λέγω,
__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →λέγω
lego
a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate
(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and
5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech
respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980
means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,
bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),
shew, speak, tell, utter.
see GREEK for 2036
see GREEK for 5346
see GREEK for 4483
see GREEK for 2980
λέγω
v.
I say, speak
λέγω legō 2x
to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →
Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:
τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,
ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν
οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
κύριος is a Greek word meaning 'lord' or 'master,' derived from the concept of authority. It is used in various contexts, referring to God, Jesus, and earthly masters. In the New Testament, it often denotes divine authority, as seen in verses like Matthew 12:8. The term can also express respect when addressing others, such as teachers or magistrates.
A MAN, according to the later Greek grammarians, was δεσπότης in respect of his slaves (Plato, Legg. vi. 756 e), therefore οἰκοδεσπότης, but κύριος in regard of his wife and children ; who in speaking either to him or of him, would give him this title of honour; “as Sara obeyed Abraham, calling him lord” (κύριον αὐτὸν καλοῦσα, I Pet. ili. 6: ef. Plutarch, De Virt. Mul. 5. vv. Μίκκα καὶ Meyoro). There is a certain truth in this distinction. Undoubtedly there lies in κύριος the sense of an authority owning limitations—moral limitations it may be; it is implied too that the wielder of this authority will not exclude, in wielding it, a consideration of their good over whom it is exercised; while the δεσπότης exercises a more unrestricted power and absolute domination, confessing no such limitations or restraints. He who addresses another as δέσποτα, puts an emphasis of submission into his…
Read the full entry →κύριος, -α, -ον (also -ος, -ον),
[in LXX (subst.) chiefly for יהוה, also for אָדוֹן, בַּעַל, etc.;]
having power (κῦρος) or authority; as subst., ὁ κ., lord, master;
κύριος, -ov, 6, (prop. an 2dj. κύριος, -a, - 1, also of two term.; prop. i. q. ὁ ἔχων κῦρος, having power or author ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing belongs, about which he has the power of deciding; master, lord; used a. univ. of the possessor and disposer of a thing, the owner, (Sept. for }}18, 5y3): with gen. of the thing, as τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος, Mt. xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 15; rod θερισμοῦ, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; τῆς οἰκίας, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12); τοῦ πώλου, Lk. xix. 33; τοῦ σαββάτου, possessed of the power to determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releasing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 28; Lk. vi. 5. with gen. of a pers., one who has control of the person, the master [A. V. lord]; in the household: δούλου, παιδίσκης, οἰκονόμου, Mt. x. 24; Lk. xii. 46 sq.; xiv. 21; xvi. 3, 5; Acts xvi. 16, 19…
Read the full entry →κύριος BGU III. ο49᾽ (c. A.D. 300) κυρίῳ μου ἀδελφῷ “Hpa, a sister (and probably wife) —P Oxy IV. 7441 (B.c. 1) (= Selections, p. 32) Ἱλαρίωνα (/.—tov)”"Adure τῆι ἀδελφῆι πλεῖστα Χαίρειν, and even a son—zd. I. 123} (iii/iv A.D.) κυρίῳ pov vid Διονυσοθέωνι. (3) It is, however, with the religious use of κύριος that we are specially concerned, and in keeping with the conception of ‘‘lordship,’’ which was so characteristic of Oriental religions, we may begin by noticing its common use in connexion with the cult of the Egyptian God Sarapis. Letters frequently begin with some such formula as—rpd μὲν πάντων εὔχομαί σε ὑιαίνειν (1. by—) καὶ τὸ προσκύνημά cov ποιῶ παρὰ τῷ κυρίῳ Σιαράπιδι, ‘before all else I pray for your health, and I supplicate the lord Sarapis on your behalf”’ (P Fay 127°—ii/iii a.p.), and we may add, owing to the striking resemblance of phraseology to 1 Cor 1024 such…
Read the full entry →κύριος (kurios) — lord: God.
κύριος [ῡ], α, ον,
also ος, ον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—Thess. κῦρρος [Refs 8th c.BC+]:
I. of persons, having power or authority over, with genitive, Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὶν ἄν σε κ. στήσω τέκνων put thee in possession of.., [Refs 5th c.BC+], of the god to whom a temple is dedicated, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; τῶν αὑτοὺ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θανάτου κ. τινός with power of life and death over, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. κύριός εἰμι with infinitive, I have authority to do, am entitled to do, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οὗτος κ. ὁρκωμοτεῖν (probably to be read instead of -ῶν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; -ώτεροι δοῦναι better able to give, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also κ. τοῦ μὴ μεθυσθῆναι having power not to.., [Refs]: with accusative et infinitive, κ. εἶναι ἢ τοίαν εἶναι [πόλιν] ἢ τοίαν [Refs 5th…
κύριος
kurios
from kuros (supremacy); supreme in authority, i.e. (as noun)
controller; by implication, Master (as a respectful title):-- God,
Lord, master, Sir.
κύριος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
lord, Lord, master, sir
κύριος kyrios 717x
a lord, master, Mt. 12:8; an owner, possessor, Mt. 20:8; a potentate, sovereign, Acts 25:26; a power, deity, 1 Cor. 8:5; the Lord, Jehovah, Mt. 1:22; the Lord Jesus Christ, Mt. 24:42; Mk. 16:19; Lk. 10:1; Jn. 4:1; 1 Cor. 4:5; freq.; κύριε, a term of respect of various force, Sir, Lord, Read the full entry →
Noun-VSM — Noun · vocative · singular · masculinevocative — the one being addressed.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-VSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Vocative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
Lord
There are various Hebrew and Greek words so rendered.
(1.) Heb. Jehovah, has been rendered in the English Bible LORD, printed in small capitals. This is the proper name of the God of the Hebrews. The form “Jehovah” is retained only in Ex. 6:3; Ps. 83:18; Isa. 12:2; 26:4, both in the Authorized and the Revised Version.
(2.) Heb. ‘adon, means one possessed of absolute control. It denotes a master, as of slaves (Gen. 24:14, 27), or a ruler of his subjects (45:8), or a husband, as lord of his wife (18:12).
The old plural form of this Hebrew word is ’adonai. From a superstitious reverence for the name “Jehovah,” the Jews, in reading their Scriptures, whenever that name…
[GOD]
This name belongs to God by preeminence; and in this sense ought never to be given to any creature. Jesus Christ, as the Messiah, the Son of God, and equal with the Father, is often called Lord in Scripture, especially in the writing of Paul. The word LORD, in the English Bible, when printed in small capitals, stands always for JEHOVAH in the Hebrew. See JEHOVAH.
753 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 718 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.
Τῶν δὲ Ἰσάκου παίδων Ἡσαῦς, περὶ ὃν μάλιστα ὁ πατὴρ ἐσπουδάκει, τεσσαράκοντα γεγονὼς ἔτη γαμεῖ Ἄδαν τὴν Ἥλωνος καὶ Ἀλιβάμην τὴν Εὐσεβεῶνος δυναστευόντων ἐν Χαναναίοις ἀνδρῶν θυγατέρας, ἑαυτὸν ποιήσας τῆς περὶ τὸν γάμον ἐξουσίας κύριον καὶ μηδὲ τῷ…
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
ὡς ἐτῶν κζ μέση μελίχρως λεύκωμα ὀφθαλμόν, μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύρριν αἱ τρεῖς τῶν Ψεμμίνιος μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῶν ἀδελφοῦ Παχνούβιος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου καὶ συνπωλουμένου, ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτοῖς πατρικῆς γῆς
Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ὁμολογεῖ Πετεσοῦχος Πετεαρσεμθέως Τορτομίννει Σχώτου Περσίνη μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς υἱοῦ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Ἁρπαήσιος ἐκ τῶν φρουρῶν περὶ τοῦ ἐὰν βεβαιώσῃ αὐτῶι
τῆς Βελλέους ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσης μελιχρόου στρογγυλοπροσώπου εὐθύρινος οὐλὴ μετώπῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν μετὰ κυρίου Πτολεμαίου τοῦ Ψενμεγχείους ὡς ἐτῶν λε μέσου … πάντες τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Παθυρίτου τὴν
μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.
μή,
subjective negative particle,
used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]
As a neg. adv., not;
with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.
μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…
Read the full entry →μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…
Read the full entry →μή (mē) — not.
μή,
Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)
__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,
__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]
μή
me
a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an
absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an
interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an
affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +
lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,
nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in
substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,
3373, 3375, 3378.
see GREEK for 3756
see GREEK for 3362
see GREEK for 3363
see GREEK for 3364
see GREEK for 3372
see GREEK for 3373
see GREEK for 3375
see GREEK for 3378
μή
Neg.prt.
not, lest
μή mē 1x
a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12
Particle-N — Particle · negativeparticle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative
1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
σκύλλω (skullō) primarily means to flay or skin, but in later Greek, it takes on a metaphorical sense of troubling or vexing someone. It is used in the New Testament to describe distress, as seen in passages like Mark 5:35 and Matthew 9:36, where it conveys a sense of being troubled or harassed. The lexicons note that it can also imply the act of troubling oneself.
* σκύλλω
in cl., to skin, flay, rend (Æsch., Anthol.).
In Hellenistic writers, to vex, trouble, annoy: c. acc. pers., Mk 5:35, Lk 8:49; pass., ἐσκυλμένοι, distressed, Mt 9:36; mid., to trouble oneself, μὴ σκύλλου, Lk 7:6 (freq. in π.; v. MM, i, ii, and cf. M, Pr., 89; Abbott, Essays, 87; Kennedy, Sources, 82).†
σκύλλω ; pf. pass. ptep. ἐσκυλμένος ; pres. mid. impv. 2 pers. sing. σκύλλου ; (σκῦλον, q-V-) 5 a. to skin, flay, (Anthol.). b. to rend, mangle, (Aeschyl. Pers. 577); lo vex, trouble, annoy, (Iidian. 7, 3, 9 [4]): τινά, Mk. v.35; Lk. viii. 49; pass. ἐσκυλμένοι, (Vulg. verati) ΓΒ. V. distressed], Mt. ix. 36 GLT Tr WH; mid. to give one’s self trouble, trouble one’s self: μὴ σκύλλου, Lk. vii. 6.
σκύλλω, which in the classical period is physical, ‘‘ flay,” ‘‘ skin,” has become in late Greek almost entirely metaphorical, and 2) τς has very different degrees of strength, like the English “ distress,’’ which answers to it very fairly all round. (1) The verb has much its old physical sense in P Par 351° (B.c. 163) (= UPZ i. p. 130) σκυλήσας τὸ ἱερόν, and BGU III. 75727 (A.p. 12) πυρίνων δραγμάτ(ων) σκύλαντες δράγμ(ατα) δέκα τρία, where it is = ‘* plunder.” (2) For the meaning ‘‘ distress,” ‘‘ harass,” as in Mt 9%°, cf. P Par 6325 (B.c. 164) (= P Petr III. p. 20) σκύλλεσθαι μὴ μετρίως, “harassed to no small extent” (Mahaffy), and P Leid G® (8.6. 185-141) (=I. p. 42) mlap exaot[ov σκ]ύλλεσθ[α7ι [ὑπ᾽] ἐνίων, ‘ continuo vexari (se) a quibusdam,” cf.44, With Mk 585, Lk 78, cf. P Oxy II. 295° (c. A.D. 35) μὴ σκίλγύλλε ἑατὴν (1. ceavtiy) ἐνπῆναι (/. ἐμφῆναι 9), “don’t trouble yourself to…
Read the full entry →σκύλλω (skullō) — to trouble.
σκύλλω,
[NT], aorist ἔσκῡλα [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—passive, see below; aorist ἐσκύλθην [Refs]; also ἐσκύλην [ῠ] (see. below): perfect ἔσκυλμαι (see. below):—= τοῖς ὄνυξι σπᾶν, [Refs 5th c.AD+]aorist infinitive σκοῦλαι (perhaps Laconian dialect),= κνῆσαι[Refs] —passive, σκύλλονται, of dead bodies torn by fish, [Refs 4th c.BC+]is dishevelled, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
2. maltreat, molest, τοὺς ἐν [τοῖς ἱεροῖς] ἀποτεταγμένους [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ὃς δὲ ἂν σκύλῃ [τὸ μνῆμα] [Refs]:—passive, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
3. trouble, annoy, τὴν ἀσθενοῦσαν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τί σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλο; [NT]; σκῦλον σεαυτὸν πρὸς ἡμᾶς φέρων.. τὴν ὕαλον bestir yourself (i.e. hurry) to us with.., [Refs 4th c.AD+] —passive and middle, μὴ…
σκύλλω
skullo
apparently a primary verb; to flay, i.e. (figuratively) to
harass:--trouble(self).
σκύλλω
v.
I flay, trouble, annoy
σκύλλω
σκύλλω, to rend, mangle:—Pass., Aesch.
metaph. to trouble, annoy, Lat. vexare, NTest.:—Pass. or Mid., μὴ σκύλλου trouble not thyself, id. NTest.; ἐσκυλμένοι troubled, distressed, id. NTest.
Verb-PPM-2S — Verb · present · passive · imperative · second person · singularpresent passive imperative — an action in progress.
V-PPM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Θαεισοῦς Συρᾶτι τῇ μητρί. γίνωσκε ὅτι Σέλευκος ἐλθὼν ὧδε πέφευγε. μὴ σκύλλε ἑαυτὴν ἐμβῆναι. προσδέχου εἰς τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν Λουκία. γράψον μοι τὴν ἡμέραν. ἄσπασαι σὺ Ἀμμωνᾶν
ν μου τὸν πατέρα ποιῆσαι· ἐπὶ τούτοις γὰρ καυχον φυσι οὐδὲν ποιῶ· σκύλλω αὐτόν· … ολουνων εἰς Τάλμιν καὶ Νερ … ς δὲ ὁ υἱός μοι διηγήσατο
The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as mē), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.
οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),
[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]
neg. particle,
not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);
absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.
οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…
Read the full entry →ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…
Read the full entry →οὐ (ou) — no.
οὐ,
the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]
I. as the negative of single words,
II. as the negative of the sentence.
I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…
οὐ
ou
ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)
ouch ookh
a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or
not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +
nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also
3364, 3372.
see GREEK for 3361
see GREEK for 3364
see GREEK for 3372
οὐ
Neg.prt.
no, not
οὐ ou 1x
negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar
Particle-N — Particle · negativeparticle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative
1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…
ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.
ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.
δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου
ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς
ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ
The Greek word γάρ (gar) is a coordinating particle primarily used to introduce reasons or explanations, similar to 'for' in English. It can serve various functions, including causal, explicative, and conclusive, and is often placed after the first word in a clause. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts that clarify or justify preceding statements, aligning with its classical usage.
γάρ, a conjunction, which ace. to its composition, γέ and dpa (i. 4. ἄρ), is properly a particle of affirmation and conclusion, denoting truly therefore, verily as the case stands, “ the thing is first aflirmed by the particle yé, and then is referred to what precedes by the force of the particle dpa” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 1, p. 232; οἵ. Kiihner ii. p. 724; [Jelf § 786; W. 445 (415) sq-]). Now since by a new affirmation not infrequently the reason and nature of something previously mentioned are set forth, it comes to pass that, by the use of this particle, either the reason and cause of a foregoing statement is added, whence arises the causal or argumentative force of the particle, for (Lat. nam, enim; Germ. denn) ; or some previous declaration is explained, whence γάρ takes on an ex plicative force: YP Sor, the fact is, namely (Lat. videlicet, Germ. ndmilich). Thus the force of the…
Read the full entry →γάρ (gar) — for.
γάρ
(γε, ἄρα), causal conjunction, used alone or with other Particles.
I. introducing the reason or cause of what precedes, for, τῷ γὰρ ἐπὶ φρεσὶ θῆκε θεὰ λευκώλενος Ἥρη· κήδετο γ. Δαναῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but frequently in explanation of that which is implied in the preceding clause, πολλάων πολίων κατέλυσε κάρηνα.. τοῦ γὰρ κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον [Refs]
I. b in simple explanations, especially after a Pronoun or demonstrative adjective, ἀλλὰ τόδ᾽ αἰνὸν ἄχος κραδίην καὶ θυμὸν ἱκάνει· Ἕκτωρ γ. ποτε φήσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ δὲ δεινότατον.. ὁ Ζεὺς γ... [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in introducing proofs or examples, μαρτύριον δέ· Δήλου γ. καθαιρομένης.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τεκμήριον δέ· οὔτε γ. Λακεδαιμόνιοι.. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in full, τεκμήριον δὲ…
γάρ
gar
a primary particle; properly, assigning a reason (used in argument,
explanation or intensification; often with other particles):--and, as,
because (that), but, even, for, indeed, no doubt, seeing, then,
therefore, verily, what, why, yet.
γάρ
Cj.
for
γάρ for, Lat. enim, and like it, regularly placed after the first word of a sentence: to introduce the reason:
ARGUMENTATIVE, to introduce the reason for a statement, which usually precedes:—when it precedes the statement, it may be rendered since, as, Ἀτρείδη, πολλοὶ γὰρ τεθνᾶσιν Ἀχαιοί, χρὴ πόλεμον παῦσαι Il.
the statement of which γάρ gives the reason may be omitted, οὐ γάρ τί μοι Ζεὺς ἦν ὁ κηρύξας τάδε [yes], for it was not Zeus, etc., Soph.; ἔστι γὰρ οὕτω [yes], for so it is, i. e. yes certainly, Plat.; οἵδ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ εἰσί: τοῦτο γάρ σε δήξεται [I say this], for it will sting thee, Eur.: —in Conditional Propositions, where the Condition is omitted, it may be transl. for otherwise, else, οὐ γὰρ ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν, (sc. εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευον)…
Read the full entry →Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
for (ki (conjunction), le, from 'el (preposition), and various other words. In the New Testament also the words are various, chiefly gar, kai gar, hoti (conjunctions); anti apo eis dia (accusative), epi (dative and accusative), peri (genitive), pros (genitive and accusative), huper (genitive) (prepositions)): the English Revised Version and the American Standard Revised Version give in many cases more literal or more accurate renderings than those in the King James Version.
In the New Testament the most important preps. from a doctrinal point of view are anti, "face to face," "over against," "instead," "on behalf of," peri, "around," "about," "concerning," huper, "over," "on behalf of." The first has been claimed as stating the substitutionary nature of Christ's sacrifice as contrasted with huper and peri, more frequently used of it. But, although anti in the New Testament often means…
1,083 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,038 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
1 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
ἀποκαταστῆναι , ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλῶς ποιήσεις παρακαλῶν σαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι Τῦβι μηνὶ μετὰ δυνάμεων ἱκανῶν πρὸς τὸ καταστεῖλαι τοὺς ἐν
ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος
ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὰ πράγματα εὔνοιαν διατηροῦντες … ε … παρὰ τῶν ἐπάνω
ἱκανός is an adjective meaning 'sufficient' or 'competent,' derived from the verb ἵκω, meaning 'to reach' or 'attain.' It describes both people and things, indicating adequacy in ability, quantity, or time. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 3:11 and Acts 17:9. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its meanings.
ἱκανός, -7, -όν, (fr. ik, ἱκάνω ; prop. ‘reaching to’, ‘attaining to’; hence ‘adequate’); as in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. and Thue. down, sufficient; a. of number and quantity; with nouns, many enough, or enough with a gen. : ὄχλος ἱκανός, a great multitude [A. V. often much people}, Mk. x. 46; Lk. vii. 12; Acts xi. 24, 26; xix. 26; λαύς, Acts v. 87 RG; κλαυθμός, Acts xx. 81; ἀργύρια ἱκανά, [A. V. large money, cf. the collog. ‘money enough’], Mt. xxviii. 12; λαμπάδες, Acts xx. 8; λόγοι; Lk. xxiii. 9; φῶς ἱκανόν, a considerable light [A. V. ἃ great light}, Acts xxii. 6. of time: ἱκανῷ χρόνῳ [οἵ. W. § 31, 9; B. § 133, 26] for a long time, [ Lk. viii. 27 T Trtxt. WII]; Acts viii. 11; also ἱκανὸν χρόνον, Acts xiv. 3; and plur. Lk. xx. 9; ἐξ ἱκανοῦ, of a long time, now for a long time, Lk. xxiii. 8 RG; also ἐκ χρόνων ἱκανῶν, Lk. viii. 27 RG LTrmrg.; xxiii. 8 LT Tr WH; [ἀπὸ ἱκανῶν ἐτῶν, these many…
Read the full entry →ἱκανός. P Petr II. 20%-7(B.c. 252) καὶ ταῦτα ἱκανοῦ τινος πλήθους [ἐπ] πεπτωκότος ἀπό τε τοῦ ἀγοραστοῦ καὶ τοῦ φορικοῦ, ‘and this when a large quantity of market and tax wheat has come in” (Ed.), P Lille I. 378 (after B.c. 241) ἱκανὰ πλήθη, ““ des sommes considérables” (Ed.), P Tebt I. 245 (B.C. 117) ἱκανὰ κεφάλαια, 76. 29! (c. B.C. 110) ἱκανῆς φορολογίας, and AMiche/ 3081° (first half ii/B.c.) ἱκανά τινα λυσιτελῆ περιπεπόηκεν, Cagnat IV. 914° (A.D. 74) ἱκανὸν ἀ[ρ]γύριον. With reference to time cf. P Par 152% (B.c. 120) ἐφ᾽ ἱκανὸν χρόνον, P Tor I. ri 15 (pic. 117) ἐφ᾽ ἱκανὰς ἡμέρας. For the word of persons see P Oxy XIV. 167215 (i/A.D.) ἐπιγνοὺς [οὖ]ϊν τὸν παρὰ col ἀέρα ἱκανὸς ἔσῃ περὶ πάντων, and for its absolute use, as in Ac 1212, 1 Cor 11°, see Chrest. I. 11B Fr. (a)? (B.c. 123) εἰς τ[ὴ]ν πόλιν ἐπιβαAédvres μ[ετὰ τ]ῶν ἱκανῶν καὶ ἱ{[ππ]έῳν [these two words are inserted above the…
Read the full entry →ἱκανός (hikanos) — sufficient.
ἱκᾰν-ός [ῐ], ή, όν,
(ἱκνέομαι) sufficing, becoming, befitting; prose adjective, used two or three times by Trag. (see. below):
I. of persons, sufficient, competent to do a thing, with infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱ. τεκμηριῶσαι sufficient to prove a point, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς σοῦ -ώτερος πεῖσα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱ. ζημιοῦν with sufficient power to punish, [Refs 5th c.BC+] with accusative _of things_, ἀνὴρ γνώμην ἱ. a man of sufficient prudence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱ. τὴν ἰατρικήν sufficiently versed in medicine, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with dative person, a match for, equivalent to, εἷς ἔχων ἰατρικὴν πολλοῖς ἱ. ἰδιώταις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐληταὶ ἱ. ὡς πρὸς ἰδιώτας very tolerable in comparison with.., [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ὁ Ἱ. the Almighty…
ἱκανός
hikanos
from hiko (hikano or hikneomai, akin to 2240) (to arrive); competent
(as if coming in season), i.e. ample (in amount) or fit (in
character):--able, + content, enough, good, great, large, long
(while), many, meet, much, security, sore, sufficient, worthy.
see GREEK for 2240
ἱκανός, ή, όν
Adj
sufficient, worthy, many, much
ἱκανός hikanos 39x
befitting; sufficient, enough, Lk. 22:38; ἱκανὸν ποιεῖν τινί, to satisfy, gratify, Mk. 15:15; τὸ ἱκανὸν λαμβάνειν, to take security or bail of any one, Acts 17:9; or persons, adequate, competent, qualified, 2 Cor. 2:16; fit, worthy, Mt. 3:11; 8:8; of number or quantity, considerable, large, great, much, and pl. many, Mt. 28:12; Mk. 10:46
ἱκανός ἱ^κα^νός, ή, όν ἵκω, ἱκάνω becoming, befitting, sufficing:
of persons, sufficient, competent, c. inf., Hdt.; ἱκ. τεκμηριῶσαι sufficient to prove a point, Thuc.; ἱκ. ζημιοῦν with sufficient power to punish, Xen.; c. acc. rei, ἀνὴρ γνώμην ἱκανός a man of sufficient prudence, Hdt.; ἱκ. τὴν ἰατρικήν sufficiently versed in medicine, Xen.:—c. dat. pers. a match for, equivalent to, εἷς πολλοῖς ἱκανός Plat.:—absol., ἱκανὸς Ἀπόλλων Soph.; ἱκ. ἂν γένοιο σύ Eur.; ἱκανοὶ ὡς πρὸς ἰδιώτας very tolerable in comparison with common men, Plat.
of things, sufficient, adequate, enough, Eur.; ἱκανὰ τοῖς πολεμίοις εὐτύχηται they have had successes enough, Thuc.:—of size, large enough, οὐχ ἱκανῆς οὔσης τῆς Ἀττικῆς id. Thuc.; ἱκανά σοι μέλαθρα…
Read the full entry →Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
41 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 40 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐπεὶ τίς ἂν εἴη τῶν δυνάμεων αὐτοῦ τόπος ἕτερος, ὃς γένοιτ’ ἂν ἱκανὸς οὐ λέγω πάσας ἀλλὰ μίαν ἄκρατον ἡντινοῦν δέξασθαί τε καὶ χωρῆσαι;
τὴν δὲ αἰτίαν ἱκανὸς μέν εἰμι ἀποδοῦναι καὶ νῦν, ἐπεὶ δʼ ὑπέσχημαι τὴν αἰτιολογίαν πάντων ἰδίᾳ συγγραψάμενος παραδώσειν, εἰς τότε καὶ τὴν περὶ αὐτῆς ἑρμηνείαν ἀναβάλλομαι.
τίς ἱκανὸς ἐν αὐτῇ εὑρεθῆναι, εἰ μὴ οὓς ἂν καταξιώσῃ ὁ θεός;
παῖδα ἢ δραχμὰς τριακοσίας . χαριεῖ οὖν ἡμῖν ἐν τάχει τοῦτο ποιήσας ἕως ἐπιδημῶ· ἱκανὸς γὰρ ὁ χρόνος. ἔρρωσο. Παχὼνς κ.
τρεῖς χαλκοῦς τρεῖς, εἰς ὄψον δραχμὰς δύο ἡμιωβέλιον οἴνου χόας ἑπτὰ ἥμισυ, φάμενος οὐχ ἱκανὰ ταῦτʼ εἶναί μοι εἰς ἄθλησιν, ἄλλʼ ἀξιῶν ὑμᾶς Δημέου θʼ ἕνεκεν καὶ τοῦ καλῶς
καὶ τοὺς παρʼ ἡμῶν· προσπέπτωκεν γὰρ Παῶν ἀναπλεῖν ἐν τῶι Τῦβι μηνὶ μετὰ δυνάμεων ἱκανῶν πρὸς τὸ καταστεῖλαι τοὺς ἐν Ἑρμώνθει ὄχλους , χρήσασθαι δʼ αὐτοῖς ὡς ἀποστάταις· ἐπισκοποῦ
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry → — 2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.
ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…
Read the full entry →ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.
ἵνα,
adverb,
I. of Place,
I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
ἵνα
hina
probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the
demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose
or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,
(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3363
ἵνα
Cj.
in order that, so that
ἵνα Adverb,
of Place,
demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.
relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.
= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.
of circumstance, when, at which, Od.
Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:
with subj.,
after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.
after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.
after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.
with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…
ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον
vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ
ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους
The Greek word ὑπό (hupo) is a preposition meaning 'under' and can take the genitive, dative, or accusative case. Its primary uses include indicating physical position, agency, and subjection, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 1:22 and Romans 6:14. The word can express both literal and metaphorical meanings, such as being under someone's influence or authority.
ὑπό (before smooth breathing ὑπ’, Mt 8:9b, Lk 7:8b; before rough breathing ὑφ’, Ro 3:9; on the neglect of elision in Mt, Lk, ll. c.a, Ga 3:22, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., iv),
prep. c. gen., dat. (not in NT), acc.
C. gen., primarily of place, under, hence, metaph., of the efficient cause, by: after passive verbs, c. gen. pers., Mt 1:22, Mk 1:5, Lk 2:18, Jo 14:21, Ac 4:11, I Co 1:11, Read the full entry →
ὑπό (i. 6. Lat. sub [Curtius § 393]), prep., under, in prof. auth. used with the gen. dat. and ace., but in the N. T. with the gen. and ace. only. [On the use and the omission of elision with it before words beginning with a vowel, see WH. App. p. 146°; Tdf. Proleg. p. iv. (addenda et emendanda).] I. with the Genitive (cf. W. 364 (342), 368 sq. (346) ; B. § 147, 29), it is used 1. prop. in a local sense, of situation or position under something higher, as ὑπὸ χθονός, often fr. Hom. down; ὁ ἐπὶ γῆς καὶ ὑπὸ γῆς χουσός, Plat. lege. 5 p. 728 a.; hence 2. metaph. of the efficient cause, as that under the power of which an event is conceived of as being; here the Lat. uses a or ab, and the Eng. by; thus a. after passive verbs,—with the gen. of a person: Mt. i. 22; ii. 15sq-; Mk.i.5; 11. 8; [viii. 31 LT Tr WH]; Lk.ii.18; [vi. 18 Ree.]; Jn.x. 14 RG; xiv. 21; Acts iv.11; xv. 4; [xxii. 30 LT Tr…
Read the full entry →ὑπό (hupo) — by/under: by.
ὑπό [ῠ],
preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative: Aeolic dialect ὐπά [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ὑπά Ἀρχ.Δελτ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ηυπύ only in [Refs 5th c.BC+] ὁπύ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in Epic dialect ὑπαί (also [Refs 5th c.BC+]: this is found in [Refs 8th c.BC+] only six times as a well-attested reading (ὑ. πόδα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere (before λ ν ρ ϝ) it is weakly attested as see l. for ὑπὸ (?~X ¯), e.g. ποσσὶ δ᾽ ὑπὸ (variant{ὑπαὶ}) λιπαροῖσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ὑπαὶ νεφέων is given by most codices in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; it is not frequently in Trag. Poets, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (ὕπο) cf. Sanskrit úpa 'towards, near to, etc.', Gothic uf 'under'.)
__A WITH GENITIVE,
ὑπό
hupo
a primary preposition; under, i.e. (with the genitive case) of place
(beneath), or with verbs (the agency or means, through); (with the
accusative case) of place (whither (underneath) or where (below) or
time (when (at)):--among, by, from, in, of, under, with. In the
comparative, it retains the same general applications, especially of
inferior position or condition, and specially, covertly or moderately.
ὑπό
Prep.
by, under, about
ὑπό hypo 220x
(1) gen., under; hence, used to express influence, causation, agency; by, Mt. 1:22 freq.; by the agency of, at the hands of, 2 Cor. 11:24; Heb. 12:3. (2) acc., under, with the idea of motion associated, Mt. 5:15; under, Jn. 1:49; 1 Cor. 10:1; under subjection to, Rom. 6:14; 1 Tim. 6:1; of time, at, about, Acts 5:21
ὑπό epic ὑπαί before δ, π from under, by, c. gen. under, c. dat., towards c. acc.
Lat. sub, prep. with gen., dat. and acc.
WITH GEN.,
of Place, from under, ῥέει κρήνη ὑπὸ σπείους Od.: of rescuing from under another's power, after the Verbs ἐρύεσθαι, ἁρπάζειν, Il.; ἵππους λῦσαν ὑπὸ ζυγοῦ they loosed the horses from under the yoke, Hom.
under, beneath, μοχλὸν ὑπὸ σποδοῦ ἤλασα thrust the bar in under the embers, Od.; ὑπὸ στέρνοιο τυχήσας having hit him under the breast, Il.; ὑπὸ χθονός Hom., etc.
of the Agent, with pass. Verbs, by, Lat. a or ab, ὑπό τινος δαμῆναι Il.; ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ by one's own action, i.e. of oneself, Thuc.; so also, with neut. verbs, φεύγειν ὑπό τινος, i. e. to flee before him, Il.; ἔπαινον ἔχειν ὑπό τινος…
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 219 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 174 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·
ἄρδεται δʼ οὗτος ὁ κῆπος ὑπὸ ἑνὸς ποταμοῦ πᾶσαν ἐν κύκλῳ τὴν γῆν περιρρέοντος, ὃς εἰς τέσσαρα μέρη σχίζεται.
ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο, ἀδελφοί μου: εἰ ὁ κύριος ὑπέμεινεν παθεῖν περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἡμῶν, ὢν παντὸς τοῦ κόσμου κύριος ᾧ εἶπεν ὁ θεὸς ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου: Ποιήσωμεν ἄνθρωπον κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμετέραν: πῶς οὖν ὑπέμεινεν ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπων παθεῖν;
r … ς οὕτως ὑπὸ γε… ς δεομένων δὲ τῶν … ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ
ἑαυτῆς οἰκείου Θοτσύτου Ἐριενούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ μέσος ὑποκόκκινος ἀπὸ τῆς ἐωνημένης παρʼ αὐτῆς ὑπὸ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανοβχούνιος τετάρτης μερίδος ἀμπελῶνος συνφύτου καὶ τῶν φυομένων δένδρων καὶ πέμπτον μερίδος
Νεχθανοῦπις Πατσεοῦτος Πέρσης ὡς ἐτῶν νε καὶ οἱ τούτου υἱοὶ ἀπὸ τῆς πεπραμένης αὐτοῖς ὑπὸ Πετεαρσεμθεία Πανοβχούνιος γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθύρειν πεδίωι ἄρουρης μιᾶς , ἧς γείτονες
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word στέγη (stegē) means 'roof' and can also refer to a roofed space or dwelling. It appears in the New Testament in contexts related to entering houses (e.g., Mt 8:8, Mk 2:4, Lk 7:6). The word is derived from the verb στέγω meaning 'to cover.' While the primary meaning is consistent, some sources note its use in various contexts, such as chambers or upper stories.
στέγη, -ης, ἡ
(< στέγω)
[in LXX: Ge 8:13 (מִכְסֶה), etc. ;]
a roof: Mk 2:4; of entering a house, εἰσέρχεσθαι ὑπὸ τὴν σ., Mt 8:8, Lk 7:6 (cf. MM, xxiii).†
στέγη, -ns, ἧ, (στέγω to cover), fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, a roof: of a house, Mk. ii. 4; εἰσέρχεσθαι ὑπὸ τὴν. στέγην τινός [see εἰσέρχομαι, 1 p. 187” bot.], Mt. viii. 8 ;, LK. vii. 6.
στέγη, “a roof ’’ (Mk 21), a poetical subst. which has passed into general use in the Kowg, e.g. P Petr 11. 12 (1)!4 (B.c. 241) Kaber(= ηι)ρηκότας τὰς στέγας, ‘having taken down the upper story ’’ (Ed.)—an action on the part of the owners to avoid having Crown officials billeted on them (π]ρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπισταθμεύεσθαι). Cf. BGU III. 1roo2® (B.c. 55) τῆς πρώτης στέγης τῆς οἰκίας, P Lond 1164 (/)** (A.D. 212) (=III. p. 162) ἡ οἰκία τῶν αὐτῶν στεγῶν, and P Flor I. 151428 (A.D. 563) ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ στέγῃ .. . ἐν TH δευτέρᾳ στέγῃ. In Sy/7 558 (= 2756)" (i/a.D.) τ(ὴν ὀπίσω τοῦ προπύλου στέγην, the reference is to the covered vestibule adjoining the gate of the Temple of Asclepius: cf. 26.18 στεγάσαι δὲ kal τοῦ προπύλου Td ὀπίσωι μέρος. A neut. subst. is found in Sy// 813 (= 5 1179)" ἐπίὶ τὸ αἸὐτὸ στέγος ἐζλθ]εῖν, and a dim. in P Oxy I. 109% (list of personal property—iii/iv A.D.) στέγαστρον καινὸν…
Read the full entry →στέγη (stegē) — roof.
στέγ-η,
Doric dialectand Aeolic dialect στέγα, ἡ, roof, [NT+5th c.BC+]; παρέχειν τινὶ σ. give one shelter, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. ceiling, [Refs 7th c.BC+]
II. roofed place, chamber, room, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; covered vestibule, [Refs]; ἕρκειος σ., of a tent, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; a hare's seat or form, [Refs]; ἐκ κατώρυχος σ., of the grave, [Refs]
II.2. storey of a house, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἡ ἀνωτάτη σ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; αἱ στέγαι the upper storeys, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
II.3. frequently in plural, house, dwelling, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κατὰ στέγας at home, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπελεῦσαι τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἐπὶ στέγαν to the man's house, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
III. deck of a ship, in Latin stega, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
στέγη
stege
strengthened from a primary tegos (a "thatch" or "deck" of a
building); a roof:--roof.
στέγη, ης, ἡ
n.f.
a flat roof of a house
στέγη στέγη, ἡ, στέγω a roof, Lat. tectum, Hdt., Aesch., Xen., etc.
a roofed place, a chamber, room, Hdt., Xen., etc.; ἑρκεῖος στ., of a tent, Soph.; ἐκ κατώρυχος στέγη, of the grave, id. Soph.
often in pl., like Lat. tecta, a house, dwelling, Aesch.; κατὰ στέγας at home, Soph.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
roof.
See HOUSE.
[HOUSE]
See HOUSE.
→ See HOUSE, ROOF OF
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ὄροφος δὲ αὐτοῖς ἐπεβέβλητο κέδρου καὶ τοῖς μὲν οἴκοις ἴδιος ἦν οὗτος ἑκάστῳ πρὸς τοὺς πλησίον οὐ συνάπτων, τοῖς δʼ ἄλλοις ὑπῆρχεν ἡ στέγη κοινὴ διʼ ἀλλήλων δεδομημένη μηκίσταις δοκοῖς καὶ διηκούσαις ἁπάντων, ὡς τοὺς μέσους τοίχους ὑπὸ τῶν αὐτῶν…
μητρικῆς οἰκίας καὶ ἑτέρων χρηστηρίων, ὑφʼ ἥν ἐστιν εἴσοδος καὶ ἔξοδος ἐν τῇ κάτω στέγῃ ἐκ τοῦ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρους τῆς Πετεεῦτος ἐκ τοῦ ἀπὸ λιβὸς μέρους οἰκίας, καὶ
ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς βορρᾶ καὶ λίβα μέρους ἀμφότεροι δὲ ἐνοικήσουσι ἐν οἴκωι τὴν δευτέραν στέγην ἐκ τοῦ πρὸς νότον καὶ ἀπηλιώτην μέρους ε … … ἀκολούθως τῇ προονομασθείσῃ διαιρέσει
αὐτῆς. μεμίσθωμαι παρὰ σοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄντος μηνὸς Χοιὰκ πρὸς χρόνον διετῆ τὴν τρίτην στέγην ἀπὸ οἰκίας σου οὔσης ἐπὶ τοῦ β ἀμφόδου πόλεως καὶ τελέσω σοι κατʼ ἔτος
ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,
pers. pron.
I.
ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…
Read the full entry →ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…
Read the full entry →μέ (me) — me.
ἐγώ,
I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…
ἐγώ
me
a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.
see GREEK for 1691
ἐγώ egō 2x
I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]
Pron-1GS — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singulargenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
P-1GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Singular
Mine
The process of mining is described in Job 28:1-11. Moses speaks of the mineral wealth of Palestine (Deut. 8:9). Job 28:4 is rightly thus rendered in the Revised Version, “He breaketh open a shaft away from where men sojourn; they are forgotten of the foot [that passeth by]; they hang afar from men, they swing to and fro.” These words illustrate ancient mining operations.
2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
The Greek word εἰσέρχομαι (*eiserchomai*) means to enter, either literally or figuratively. It is composed of the prefix εἰς (into) and the root ἔρχομαι (to come). This term is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including entering a house (Matthew 8:5) or the kingdom of God (Matthew 7:13). It can also refer to entering into states of being or experiences, such as hope or temptation.
εἰσ-έρχομαι,
[in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא ;]
to go in or into, enter: Mt 9:25, Lk 7:45, al.; seq. εἰς, Mt 10:12, Mk 2:1, al.; seq. διά (πύλης, θύρας, etc.), Mt 7:13, Jo 10:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. στέγην, Mt 8:8; c. adv.: ὅπου, Mk 14:14, He 6:20; ὧδε, Mt 22:12; ἔσω, Mt 26:58; seq. πρός, c acc. pers., Mk…
Read the full entry →εἰσ-έρχομαι ; fut. εἰσελεύσομαι ; 2 aor. εἰσῆλθον, 2 pers. plur. εἰσήλθατε (Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -@ere), impy. εἰσέλθατε (Mt. vii. 13 but R ἃ -θετε, [3d pers. sing. -θάτω Mk. xiii. 15, R G -θέτω]) ; see ἀπέρχομαι, init. ; pi. εἰσελήλυθα, 3 pers. plur. εἰσελήλυθαν (Jas. v. 4, for RG εἰσεληλύθασιν, see γίνομαι, init.); Sept. mostly for 8)3; to go or come into or in; to enter; 1. prop., of men and of animals: foll. by eis with specification of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq-), as into a house, into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place, —when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix. 25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.]; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 ef. 25; xxiv.3; Actsi. 13; v. 7,10; x. 25; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq. ; or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii. 24; xvii. 7; εἰς is also added…
Read the full entry →εἰσέρχομαι. With the use of εἰσέρχομαι in Lk 177 we may compare P Eleph 138 (B.c. 223-2) οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ. For other examples of this common verb, cf. P Ryl 11. 151° (A.D. 40) εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν ὑ[πάρ]χοί(υσαν) ἐν τῇ κώμῃ οἰκ[ίαν, P Oxy ID. 237% 17 (a.p. 186) τὸν μείζονα ἀγῶνα e[i]oeXevoerat, ‘he shall enter upon the more serious lawδι (Edd.), and P Tebt 11. 4188 (iii/A.D.) καλῶς ποιήσεις, ἀδελφέ, [ἐϊὰν εἰσέρχῃ ἐνεγκὼν μετὰ σεαυτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκά μου, ἔγραψα [γ]ὰρ αὐτῇ σὺν σοὶ εἰσελθεῖν, “you will do well, brother, to come up and bring my wife with you, for I have written to her to come with you’’ (Edd.). See also P Leid W¥-4! (ii/iii A.D.) Κύριε... . εἴσελθε καὶ ἐπάκουσόν por. On the use of the mid. εἰσέλθοιτο for the active in Phrygian sepulchral inscrr. see W. M. Ramsay Exp T xxvi. p.…
Read the full entry →εἰσέρχομαι (eiserchomai) — to enter.
εἰσέρχομαι,
future -ειεύσομαι: aorist -ήλῠθον, -ῆλθον: in Attic dialect, future is supplied by εἴσειμι, and imperfect by εἰσῄειν:— go in or into, enter, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄλσος, δόμους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰσῆλθ᾽ ἑκατόμβας invaded the hecatombs, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but in Prose mostly with Preps., ἐς οἴκημα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς. ἐς τὰς σπονδάς come into the treaty, [Refs]; εἰς τὸν πόλεμον variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους enter the ranks of the Ephebi, [Refs]; also εἰ. πρός τινα enter his house, visit him, [Refs]; of a doctor, pay a visit, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, of money, etc., come in, προσόδους εἰσελθούσας [Refs]
Read the full entry →εἰσέρχομαι
eiserchomai
from 1519 and 2064; to enter (literally or figuratively):--X arise,
come (in, into), enter in(-to), go in (through).
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 2064
εἰσέρχομαι
v.
I go in, come in, enter
εἰσέρχομαι eiserchomai 194x
to go or come in, enter, Mt. 7:13; 8:5, 8; spc. to enter by force, break in, Mk. 3:27; Acts 20:29; met. with εἰς κόσμον, to begin to exist, come into existence, Rom. 5:12; 2 Jn. 7; or, to make one’s appearance on earth, Heb. 10:5; to enter into or take possession of, Lk. 22:3; Jn. 13:27; to enter into, enjoy, partake of, Mt. 19:23, 24; to enter into any one’s labor, be his successor, Read the full entry →
εἰσέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι aor2 -ήλυ^θον, -ῆλθον but attic fut. is supplied by εἴσειμι and imperf. by εἰσῄειν Dep.:— to go in or into, enter, c. acc., Il., etc.; in Prose, εἰς. εἰς . . , Xen., etc.; εἰς. εἰς τὰς σπονδάς to come into the treaty, Thuc.; εἰς. εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους to enter the Ephebi, Xen.: of money, to come in, id. Xen.
of the chorus or of actors, to come upon the stage, to enter, Plat., Xen.:— to enter the lists, Soph.
as attic law-term, of the accuser, to come into court, Plat., Dem.
metaph., [μένος] ἄνδρας ἐσέρχεται courage enters into the men, Il.; Κροῖσον γέλως εἰσῆλθεalso c. dat., δέος εἰς. τινι Plat.:—also to come into one's mind, Hdt.; so, impers., εἰσῆλθε αὐτόν, c. inf., it comes into one's head that . . , id.…
Verb-2AAS-2S — Verb · second aorist · active · subjunctive · second person · singularsecond aorist active subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAS-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Subjunctive Person: second Number: Singular
kum: The translation of many Hebrew and Greek words. In the phrase "The Spirit of Yahweh came mightily upon him" (Jud 14:6,19; 15:14; 1Sa 10:10; 11:6; 16:13), the word is tsaleah; Jud 14:6; 15:14 "came mightily," which is the uniform translation of the Revised Version (British and American) (compare Jud 13:25 "to move," i.e. to disturb or stir up). In Jud 6:34; 1Ch 12:18; 2Ch 24:20, it is labhesh, "to clothe"; the Revised Version, margin "The Spirit .... clothed itself with Gideon" and .... "with Zechariah,"…
194 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 67 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 333 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
διὸ καὶ Μωυσῆς φησιν ὅτι „οὐκ ἐάσει τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ὑμῶν πατάξαι“ (Exod.
καὶ οἱ μὲν μηδὲ θύσαντες, οἱ δὲ ἡμιέργους τὰς θυσίας καταλιπόντες, πολλοὶ δʼ οὐδʼ ἀρχὴν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν δυνηθέντες ἀπίασιν ὑπακούειν τοῖς Μωυσέος προστάγμασι μᾶλλον ἢ ποιεῖν τὰ κατὰ βούλησιν τὴν ἑαυτῶν προτιμῶντες, καὶ τὸν ἐλέγξοντα περὶ…
Ἰδού, τάδε λέγει κύριος ὁ θεός: Εἰσέλθατε εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν ἀγαθήν, ἣν ὤμοσεν κύριος τῷ Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ καὶ Ἰακώβ, καὶ κατακληρονομήσατε αὐτήν, γῆν ῥέουσαν γάλα καὶ μέλι.
τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος. Ἡραῒς γυνὴ Ἡρακλᾶτος τοῦ Π … … τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς κώμης εἰσελθοῦσα εἰς τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ οἰκίαν καὶ συλλαβοῦσα τὴν θυγατέρα μου ἔδωκεν πληγὰς
r Θαυβᾶς Πομπηίωι τῶι πατρὶ χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσεις λαβὼν τὴν ἐπιστολήν μου ἐξαυτῆς εἰσελθὼν διὰ τὸ τὴν ταλαίπωρον θυγατέρα σου Ἑρεννίαν τετελευτηκέναι καὶ ἤδη εὐτυχῆσθαιτῷ Φαῶφι τῆι ἐνάτηι
μερίδος στρατηγοῦ … … ος τὸ ὑπογεγραμμένον ε … ως ἐξ ἡμῶν ἄνδρες ι εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν κράτιστον πρὸς τῷ ἰδίῳ λόγῳ ἠξίουν ἐξετασθῆναι πότερον πραταὶ αἱ τάξεις εἰσὶν
